Konica-Minolta BizHub Pro 1050,1050P Theory of Operation

1050ma.
book Page 1 Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM
SERVICE MANUAL
Theory of Operation
2005.03 Ver. 2.0
1050ma.book Page 2 Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM
1050matce.fm Page i Wednesday, March 2, 2005 11:10 PM
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2 SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11 IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11 INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-12 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Composition of the service manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi Notation of the service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vii II Composition/Operation I Outline
Measures to take in case of an accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x I OUTLINE
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 4. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
II
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 2.3 Timing chart when the power is on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Control block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 3.1 3.2 Scanner/exposure lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Original size detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 AE/AES control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Image processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
1. OVERALL COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
3. WRITE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Laser beam path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Write control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
1050matce.fm Page ii Wednesday, March 2, 2005 11:10 PM
CONTENTS 3.2.4 4.1 4.2 4.3
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 Image stabilization control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
4. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 I Outline Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 II Composition/Operation 5.1 5.2 5.3 Drum claw drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Cooling around the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Image stabilization control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
5. CHARGING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 6.1 6.2 6.3 Charging control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Wire cleaning control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Erase lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
6. TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.4 6.4.1 7.1 7.2 7.3 Transfer guide control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Transfer/separation control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Transfer exposure lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Transfer assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Wire cleaning control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Transfer assist sheet by paper sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
PCS correspondence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
7. DEVELOPING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 8.1 8.2 8.3 Flow of developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Developing bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Developing suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Image stabilization control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
8. TONER SUPPLY SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 9.1 9.2 9.3 Toner conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Toner supply control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Toner remaining detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
9. CLEANING/RECYCLE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 Cleaning operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Toner collection mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Toner conveyance operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Image stabilization control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
ii
1050matce.fm Page iii Wednesday, March 2, 2005 11:10 PM
CONTENTS
10. PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 10.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 10.2.1 Tray lift drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 10.2.2 Paper feed drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 10.2.3 Pick-up drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 10.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 10.3.1 Up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 10.3.2 Size detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 10.3.3 Pick-up mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 10.3.4 Separation mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 10.3.5 Air assist mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 10.3.6 Paper empty detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 10.3.7 Remaining paper detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 10.3.8 Tray lock control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 10.3.9 Dehumidification heater control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 10.4 PCS corresponding parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 10.4.1 Corresponding to additional prints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 11. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 11.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 11.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 11.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 11.3.1 Pre-registration control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 11.3.2 Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 11.3.3 Exit conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 11.3.4 Paper dust removing mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 12. REGISTRATION SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 12.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 12.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 12.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 12.3.1 Multi feed detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 12.3.2 Loop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 12.3.3 Paper mis-centering adjustment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 12.3.4 Paper leading edge timing adjustment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 13. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 13.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 13.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 13.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 13.3.1 Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 14. ADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 14.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 14.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 14.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 14.3.1 Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 15. FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 15.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 15.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 15.2.1 Web drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 15.2.2 Fusing drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 15.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 II Composition/Operation I Outline 10.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
iii
1050matce.fm Page iv Wednesday, March 2, 2005 11:10 PM
CONTENTS
15.3.1 Fusing roller drive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 15.3.2 Web drive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 I Outline 15.3.3 Fusing temperature control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 15.3.4 Thick paper conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 15.3.5 Protection against an error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 16. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 16.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 16.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 16.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 II Composition/Operation 16.3.1 Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 17. INTERFACE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82 17.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82 18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 18.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 18.2 Operation flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 18.2.1 Image stabilization control flow when the power switch (SW2) is ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 18.2.2 Image stabilization control flow while in the print and during idling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86 19. IMAGE PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88 19.1 Image processing in the scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88 19.1.1 Shading correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89 19.1.2 AE control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90 19.1.3 Area discrimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91 19.1.4 Brightness/density conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91 19.1.5 Filter/magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92 19.1.6 Scanner gamma correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 19.1.7 Halftone processing (error diffusion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 19.1.8 Tilt adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 19.1.9 Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 19.1.10 Storage of image data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 19.2 Image processing in the write section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 20. OTHERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 20.1 Other fan controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 20.1.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 20.1.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 20.2 HDD control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 20.2.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 20.2.2 Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 20.3 Counter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 20.3.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 20.3.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 20.4 Parts that operate when the power switch is turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105 20.4.1 Parts that operate when the main power switch is turned ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
iv
1050ma.book Page v Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM
Introduction
Introduction
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark: To indicate clearly a section revised, show A number within to the left of the revised section. represents the number of times the revision has been made.
1
To indicate clearly a section revised, show A number within

1
in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
represents the number of times the revision has been made.
Note: Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted. When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2005/03 2004/10 Date
2.0 1.0 Service manual Ver. Revision mark
Revision due to the addition of a new option (SD, RC) Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision
1050ma.book Page vi Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM
Introduction
Composition of the service manual

This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters:
<Theory of Operation section> I. OUTLINE: System configuration, product specifications, unit configuration, and paper path II. COMPOSITION/OPERATION: Configuration of each unit, explanation of the operating system, and explanation of the control system This section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of each part.
<Field service section> I. OUTLINE: II. MAINTENANCE: System configuration, and product specifications Service schedule *, maintenance steps, list of service tools and directions for use *, firmware version up method *, and removal/reinstallation methods of major parts III. ADJUSTMENT/SETTING: IV. TROUBLESHOOTING *: Utility mode *, service mode *, security *, mechanical adjustment and POD corresponding adjustment List of jam codes, their causes, operation when a jam occurs and its release method, and list of error codes, their causes, operation when a warning is issued and estimated abnormal parts. V. APPENDIX *: Parts layout drawings, connector layout drawings, timing chart, overall layout drawing This section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the customer's premise), a rough outline of the service schedule and its details, maintenance steps, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.
The details of items with an asterisk "*" are described only in the service manual of the main body.
vi
1050ma.book Page vii Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM
Introduction
Notation of the service manual

1. Product name In this manual, each of the products is described as follows: (1) IC board: (2) KonicaMinolta bizhub PRO 1050: (3) PS-502 PostScript3 Option: (4) Microsoft Windows 95: Microsoft Windows 98: Microsoft Windows Me: Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Microsoft Windows 2000: Microsoft Windows XP: Standard printer Main body PS3 Option Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 95/98/Me Windows NT 4.0/2000 Windows NT/2000/XP Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP
When the description is made in combination of the OS's mentioned above:
2. Brand name The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered trademark of each company.
3. Electrical parts and signals Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many. Classification Load symbol IN PS Sensor PS Door PS1 SIG 102 PS 24V Solenoid SD DRV SOL 24V Clutch CL DRV SOL 24V CONT Motor M DRV1 DRV2 D1 D2 Drive signals of two kinds Power to drive the solenoid Drive signal Power to drive the clutch Drive signal Power to drive the motor Drive signal Sensor detection signal Ex. of signal name Description
vii
1050ma.book Page viii Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM
Introduction Classification Load symbol _U _V _W DRV1 DRV2 DRV3 D1 D2 D3 D4 DRV A DRV A DRV B DRV B A Motor M /A B /B AB BB CLK, PLL LCK, Lock, LD FR EM, Lock, LCK, LD BLK P/S S/S SS CW/CCW, F/R ENB TEMP_ER 24V Fan FM CONT, DRIVE HL EM, Lock, LCK, FEM Others Ground TH1.S, ANG SG, S.GND, S_GND PG, P.GND Ex. of signal name
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 Description
Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds Motor, phases A and B control signals
PLL control signal PLL lock signal Forward/reverse rotation signal Motor lock abnormality Drive brake signal Power/stop Operating load start/stop signal Rotational direction switching signal Effective signal Motor temperature abnormality detection signal Power to drive the fan motor Drive signal Speed control signal (2 speeds) Detection signal Analog signal Signal ground Power ground
viii
1050ma.book Page ix Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name DCD SIN SOUT DTR Serial communication GND DSR, DSET RTS CTS RI TXD RXD Serial input Serial output Data terminal operation available Signal ground (earth) Data set ready Transmission request signal Consent transmission signal Ring indicator Serial transmission data Serial reception data Description Data carrier detection
Introduction
ix
1050ma.book Page x Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM
Measures to take in case of an accident
Measures to take in case of an accident

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency
measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried
out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site
checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in "Serious Accident
Report/Follow-up Procedures."
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
I OUTLINE
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A. System configuration I Outline
[4]
[3]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[5]
[9] [10]
[6]
[11]
[7] [12]
1050to1001e
1 -1
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION [1] [2] I Outline [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] *1 *2 Main body Large capacity paper feed unit (PF-701) Double sided original auto feeder (DF-603) *1 Flat stapling finisher (FS-503) Punch and multi folding finisher (FD-501) Large capacity stacker (LS-501) Large capacity stacker (LS-502)
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] Toner recycle cut kit (RC-501) Expanded memory: 256 MB (EM-701) for the image controller Side cover *2 Saddle stitching trimmer finisher (SD-501) Hand cart (LC-501)
In the case of the 1050P, no scanner/DF function is provided. Attach the side cover when PF-701 is not connected. The side cover is available as the service parts.
B. Option coupling formation NOTE The option can be connected. However, be sure to take note of the AC connection mode.
Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Main body Main body Main body Main body Main body Main body Main body Main body Main body LS-501 LS-501 LS-501 FD-501 FD-501 FS-503 LS-501 FS-503 FD-501 SD-501 SD-501 SD-501 FS-503 LS-502 FS-503
AC power to be connected to Inch External (SD-501) External (FD-501/SD-501) External (FD-501/SD-501) Inlet: (1st tandem LS-501) Inlet: (2nd tandem LS-501) Inlet: (LS-501) Inlet: (LS-501) Metric External (FD-501)
LS-502 FS-503
NOTE Any coupling formation other than the above is unavailable. PF-701 can be either connected or disconnected.
1 -2
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
I Outline
2.1
Type:
Type
Console type (floor-mounted type) Indirect electrostatic method Fixed Left rear standard OPC Laser writing Two trays (1,500 sheets x 2, 20lb, 80 gsm) PF-701 (2,000 x 3, 80 gsm) *1
Copying method: Original stand: Original alignment: Photosensitive material: Sensitizing method: Paper feed trays: *1 The PF-701 is optional.
2.2
Functions
Sheet, book, solid object A3, or 11 x 17 Inch: 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, B4, A4, B5, B5R, 8 x 13, 8.12 x 13.2, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm), standard index paper Metric:A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8 x 13, 8.12 x 13.2, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm), standard index paper ADU: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5 x 11R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)
Original: Maximum original size: Copy size: Tray /1, /2:
Magnification: Fixed magnification: Inch: x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.545, x 1.294, x 1.214, x 0.785, x 0.772, x 0.647, x 0.500 Metric:x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.414, x 1.224, x 1.154, x 0.866, x 0.816, x 0.707, x 0.500 Special magnification setting: Zoom magnification: Vertical magnification: Horizontal magnification: Warm-up time: First copy out time: Continuous copy speed: Continuous copy count: Copy density selection: Resolution: Scan: Write: Memory: Interface section: 600 dpi x 600 dpi 600 dpi x 600 dpi 256 MB (DRAM) + 10 GB (HDD1) RJ45 Ethernet, Serial port (RS232-C): Main body right side Serial port (USB Type B), Parallel port: Mounted on the Image processing board (IPB) 3 types x 0.250 to x 4.000 (at the step of 0.1%) x 0.250 to x 4.000 (at the step of 0.1%) x 0.250 to x 4.000 (at the step of 0.1%) Less than 6 min. (at temperature of 20C, at rated voltage) Less than 3.0 sec. 105 copies/min. (for A4/8.5 x 11) Up to 9,999 sheets AE/AES, manual (9 steps), user density (2 steps)
1 -3
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS No. of originals to be stored:
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 More than 10,000 sheets Under the following conditions: Original: FAX#4CHART/A4 Density: Manual 5 Mode: Text/photo
I Outline
2.3
Type of paper
60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2, high-quality paper OHP film, label paper, *4 coated paper, 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 recycled paper, 50 g/m2 to 60 g/m2, 16lb, high-quality paper (thin), 91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2, 25lb to 72lb, high-quality paper (thick) *5
Plain paper *2: Special paper *3:
*2
Standard specified paper: Inch: Metric: Hammermill Tidal MP (75 g/m2), Konica Minolta Profi (80 g/m2), HM-Cover65lb (176 g/m2), XeroxDigitalLasr65lb (176 g/m2), DomterCdor65lb, COUGARCOVER65lb (176 g/m2) Metric: RDEREY200 (200 g/m2), RDEREY160 (160 g/m2), NEUCOLORCOPY (200 g/m2), XeroxColotech (200 g/m2), Xerox3R91798 (160 g/m2) Thin paper: Label paper: Coated paper: Inch: Metric: Inch: Metric: Inch: Domter16lb (Doqupach16lb) Clair Mail (60 g/m2) AVERY 5160 AVERY DSP24 KROMEKOTE PLUSLASER HIGH GROSS 183 g/m2 (Smart Paper Company), Futural Laser 105 g/m2 (Stora Enso Paper Company) Metric:
*3
Special paper/recommended paper: Thick paper: Inch:
*4 *5
Label paper is loaded and fed one sheet at a time. 245 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 paper is available only for the middle stage tray of the PF-701.
2.4
Maintenance
Once every 750,000 prints 40,000,000 prints or 7 years (whichever earlier)
Maintenance: Machine service life:
1 -4
2.5
Machine data
Metric: AC230V 10%, 50Hz Less than 3600W (full option) Less than 3450W (full option) I Outline Inch: Inch: Metric: AC208V to 240V 10%, 60Hz
Power source: Power consumption: Weight: Dimensions: 1050: 1050P:
1050: Approx. 330 kg (with DF provided) / 1050P: Approx. 310 kg W 895 mm x D 775 mm x H 1190 mm W 895 mm x D 775 mm x H 1020 mm W 2902 mm x D 775 mm x H 1190 mm
1050 + PF-701 + FD-501 + FS-503:
1050P + PF-701 + LS-501 + LS-502: W 3292 mm x D 775 mm x H 1020 mm (with no operation board included in each case)
2.6
Operating environment
10C to 30C (50F to 86F) 10% RH to 80% RH
Temperature: Humidity: NOTE
The information herein May be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1 -5
UNIT CONFIGURATION
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION
I Outline
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[3]
[9]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Operation panel Write section Developing section Registration section ADU Vertical conveyance section Paper feed section [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] Toner supply section Paper exit section Reverse/exit section Fusing section Scanner section Cleaning section
[6]
1050to1002c
Photo conductor section
1 -6
PAPER PATH
4. PAPER PATH
I Outline
1050to1003c
[6]
[7]
[1]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Registration conveyance Tray /2 paper feed Tray /1 paper feed ADU Paper feed
[4]
[3]
[5] [6] [7]
[2]
Reversed paper exit Straight paper exit ADU reverse conveyance
1 -7
PAPER PATH
I Outline
Blank page
1 -8
1050ma.book Page 1 Wednesday, March 2, 2005 3:52 PM
OVERALL COMPOSITION
II COMPOSITION/OPERATION
1. OVERALL COMPOSITION
1.1 Timing chart when the power is on
[1][2][3]
Time (sec) F R Exposure lamp (L1) Fusing heater lamps /1, /2 (L2, L3) Fusing heater lamp /3 (L4) Fusing motor (M1) Charger cleaning limit sensor (PS27) Charger cleaning motor (M23) F R Charger cleaning home sensor (PS26) Transfer/separation cleaning limit sensor (PS39) Transfer/separation cleaning motor (M20) F R
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
II Composition/Operation
1050to2322c
Item Scanner motor (M27)
Transfer/separation cleaning home sensor (PS38) Drum motor (M2) Developing motor (M3) Polygon motor (M21) Laser (LDB) Paper lift motor /1 (M25) Upper limit sensor (PS6) Paper lift motor /2 (M26) Upper limit sensor /2 (PS12)
[1] [2]
Power switch (SW2) on Initial communication between the overall control board (OACB) and the printer control board (PRCB)
[5] [6]
Start of consumable stabilization control Start of image stabilization control (for the drum potential correction control, the maximum density adjustment control and the gamma correction control)
[3] [4]
Shading correction starts The thermistor /1 (TH1) and the thermistor / 3 (TH3) get to the specified temperature [7]
Warming-up completed
NOTE Various types of operations vary depending on the software DIPSW setting and the environmental settings in the service mode. The power is ON with the DF closed. The power is turned ON with the paper lift plate of the tray brought down.
2 -1
OVERALL COMPOSITION
1.2
Control block diagram

CCD HDD USB I/F Parallel I/F APS
OB
DF
IPB
RS232C PCI I/F I/F
LAN I/F
OACB
Write Section
FM
CL
SD
PS
PRCB
SDB
ACDB
ADUDB1
ADUDB2
FD/FS/LS
PF
[6]
[1] [2] [3] Image bus Parallel bus
[5]
[4]
[3]
[4] [5] [6] UART bus Other bus
[2]
[1]
1050to2005c
Clock-synchronized serial bus
Individual signal line
2 -2
SCANNER SECTION
2. SCANNER SECTION
2.1 Composition
[4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[3]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Item
[2]
[1]
Specification/mechanism Original stand fixed, exposure unit scan Exposure unit fixed, original scan Fan Photo sensor + stepping motor pulse control V-mirror unit Xenon lamp 75,000 lx Photo sensor + CCD sensor Lens + CCD sensor
1050to2006c
Platen mode exposure method DF mode exposure method Exposure unit cooling method (DF mode) Exposure unit home position detection method Read light reflection method Exposure light source Original size detection method Image read method
2 -3
SCANNER SECTION
2.2
Drive
[3] [4] [5]
[2]
[1] [2] [3] Scanner wire /Fr V-mirror unit Scanner motor (M27) [4] [5]
[1]
Scanner wire /Rr Exposure unit
1050to2007c
2 -4
SCANNER SECTION
2.3
2.3.1
Operation
Scanner/exposure lamp control
A. Operations when the power is ON When the power switch (SW2) is turned ON, the exposure unit conducts the home position search and the shading correction. (1) Home position search The operation of the home position search varies depending on the ON/OFF condition of the scanner home sensor (PS51) [2]. Home position search when the scanner home sensor (PS51) is OFF. II Composition/Operation
1050to2008c
1050to2009c
[2]
[1]
[1]
Position at which the platen APS is read
[2]
Scanner home sensor (PS51)
Home position search when the scanner home sensor (PS51) is ON.
[2]
[1]
[1]
Position at which the platen APS is read
[2]
Scanner home sensor (PS51)
2 -5
SCANNER SECTION (2) Shading correction
After completion of the home position search [3], the exposure unit conducts shading corrections. There are three types of shading corrections: white correction 1 [4], white correction 2 [5] and black correction [6]. For the shading correction at the time of the power ON, these corrections are carried out in a series of operations.
[2]
[1] [3]
[4] [5] [6]
[7]
[8] [9] [10]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Position at which the APS is read Scanner home sensor (PS51) Home position search terminated White correction 1 White correction 2 [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Black correction Home position search Standby position while in the DF mode Exposure lamp (L1) ON Movement of the exposure lamp
1050to2010c
2 -6
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 B. Operations when the start button is turned ON (1) When the platen is in use
SCANNER SECTION
When the start button is turned ON, the exposure unit conducts the shading correction and then the exposure scan. When the AE/AES is selected, the AE/AES scan [7] is made before the exposure scan is made. For the shading correction while in the exposure scan, the black correction is not conducted because of the exposure lamp being left turned on. While in the AE/AES copy
[2]
[1] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[7]
[9]
[8]
[10] [11]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Position at which the APS is read Scanner home sensor (PS51) DF close Start button ON White correction 1 White correction 2 [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] AE/AES scan
1050to2011c
Position at which the original is read Home position search Exposure lamp (L1) ON Movement of the exposure lamp
2 -7
SCANNER SECTION While in the manual copy
[2]
[1] [3] [4] [5]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[9] [10]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Position at which the APS is read Scanner home sensor (PS51) DF close Start button ON White correction 1 [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] White correction 2
1050to2012c
2 -8
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 (2) When the DF is in use
SCANNER SECTION
When the start button is turned ON [3], the exposure unit conducts the shading correction and then moves to the position at which the DF is read. The same operations are made when the AE/AES is selected. And, for the shading correction in the DF mode, the black correction is not made because of the exposure lamp being left turned on.
[2]
[1]
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[8] [9]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Position at which the APS is read Scanner home sensor (PS51) Start button ON White correction 1 White correction 2 [6] [7] [8] [9]
1050to2013c
2 -9
SCANNER SECTION 2.3.2 Original size detection control
A. Detection method The DF mode and the platen mode is different in the detection method of the original size. (1) DF mode See the DF-603. (2) Platen mode In the direction of the main scan II Composition/Operation Read by the CCD sensor. In the direction of the sub-scan Detected by the combination of the ON/OFF of the APS sensor /1 (PS52) and the APS sensor /2 (PS53).
Original size Smallest B6R B5R B5 B4 A5R A5 A4R A4 A3 Wide paper 5.5 x 8.5R 5.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 11R 8.5 x 11 11 x 17 16K 8K 16KR *
CCD sensor (Length of detection: mm) 102.0 128.0 182.0 257.0 257.0 148.0 210.0 210.0 297.0 297.0 304.8 139.7 215.9 215.9 215.9 279.4 279.4 267.0 267.0 195.0
PS52 ON/OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
PS53 ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
For "" in the table above, either of ON and OFF is acceptable as a result of the detection.
2 -10
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 B. Detection timing
SCANNER SECTION
[1]
APS timing sensor (PS317) RADF open/close sensor (PS301) Exposure lamp (L1)
[2]
[1]
1st original size detection (with DF closed)
[2]
2nd original size detection
2.3.3
AE/AES control
When the AE/AES is selected, the density level of the original is detected automatically to adjust it to an appropriate density. The sampling range of the original density when the AE/AES is controlled is different for the platen mode and the DF mode. (1) AE/AES sampling range in the platen mode
[1]
[1] 30 mm
1050to2014c
2 -11
1050to2016c
SCANNER SECTION (2) AE/AES sampling range in the DF mode
[2] [1]
[1] 4 mm [2] 1 mm
1050to2015c
2.3.4
Image processing
There are following items for the image processing. For particulars, see "19. IMAGE PROCESSING." Shading correction AE/AES processing Area discrimination Brightness/density conversion Filter/magnification Density gamma (conversion) Halftone processing (error diffusion) Tilt adjustment Compression Storage of image data
2 -12
WRITE SECTION
3. WRITE SECTION
3.1 Composition
[5]
[6]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
Symbol [1] [2] Item Laser beam scan assist Laser scan method Specification/mechanism Collimator lens + CY1 lens + f lens + CY2 lens Polygon mirror (6 faces) + motor 57874.02 rpm (line speed: 490 mm/s) 50196.85 rpm (line speed: 425 mm/s) 34251.97 rpm (line speed: 290 mm/s) [3] [4] [5] [6] Light source Positioning method Laser refraction Polygon motor cooling method 1-chip 2-beam light emitting diode Output: 15 mW per beam Index sensor + Index mirror Write mirror Fan
1050to2017c
2 -13
WRITE SECTION
3.2
3.2.1
Operation
Outline
Analog image data read by the CCD sensor is AD converted by the CCD board (CCDB) before being sent out to the image processing board (IPB) for data processing. The image data thus processed is converted into laser beams by the laser drive board (LDB) and written onto the drum. The laser emits 2 beams with a single laser diode and writes 2 lines in one scan. The position at which the write starts is detected by the index board (INDEXB). The 2 image memory control ASIC's equipped on the image processing board (IPB) conduct the compression/ II Composition/Operation decompression processing of the image data on the main image memory (256 MB) and the sub image memory (64 MB). This is to improve the multi access and realize the thumb-nail display function. Through the control of the HDD controller on the IPB, the space of 10 GB out of the large capacity hard disk /1 (HDD1) of 40 GB is used as an image memory. This space of 10 GB serves as an extension of each of the on-board image memories to reduce the occurrence of memory overflow.
2 -14
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 3.2.2 Laser beam path
WRITE SECTION
[8]
[1]
[2] [6] [3] [4]
[5]
1050to2018c
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Polygon mirror CY1 lens Collimator Laser diode
[5] [6] [7] [8]
Drum CY2 lens Write mirror f lens
3.2.3
Write control
To prevent the mis-centering of written images, an INDEX signal detected by the index board (INDEXB) is used to decide a reference position for writing in the direction of the drum shaft (main scan direction) and control the starting position of the laser writing on the drum according to the paper edge detected by the centering sensor (PS54).
2 -15
[7]
WRITE SECTION 3.2.4 Image stabilization control
A. MPC (Maximum power control) The image processing board (IPB) indicates to the laser drive board (LDB) a maximum output value emitted by the laser to set the maximum output value. The LDB stores this set value and maintains the amount of the laser beam stored through the APC (automatic power control) operations. See "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing When the power switch (SW2) is turned ON. After this, the MPC value is controlled by the dot diameter II Composition/Operation adjustment control. B. APC (Auto power control) The laser drive board (LDB) monitors the laser beam output for each scanned line. When the image processing board (IPB) completes the MPC setting, the LDB controls the laser output to the MPC value for each scanned line. C. Dot diameter correction control The patch image density on the drum is detected by the sensor on the toner control sensor board (TCSB), and the laser drive board (LDB) controls the amount of the laser beam so that its output value becomes the specified value. See "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing while in the print When selecting "auto dot diameter adjustment" in the service mode. (2) Execution timing other than while in the print After completion of the job for each 40,000 prints on the PM counter.
2 -16
PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION
4. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION

4.1 Composition
[6] [7]
[2]
[1]
[5]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Item Environment temperature detection Drum potential detection method Gradation detection Paper jam prevention method Maximum density detection Drum jam detection Drum Drum periphery cooling method
[4]
[3]
1050to2019c
Specification/mechanism Drum temperature sensor (thermistor contact type) Drum potential sensor (surface electrometer) Gamma sensor (diffused light detection type) Drum claw Maximum density sensor (reflective light detection type) Jam sensor (reflective light detection type) OPC (99.7 mm) Fan + duct
2 -17
4.2
Drive
A. Drum drive
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1] [2] Drum Drum motor (M2) [3] Flywheel
1050to2020c
B. Drum claw drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
1050to2021c
[1] [2]
Drum claw Drum claw solenoid (SD5)
[3]
Drum motor (M2) drive input gear
2 -18
4.3
4.3.1
Operation
Drum claw drive
A. Purpose To prevent the occurrence of a drum wrap jam, 3 drum claws are employed to prevent the drum from being wrapped with the copy paper. The contact and the release of contact of the drum claws onto the drum is made by turning ON/OFF the drum claw solenoid (SD5). B. Oscillation operation To prevent the transfer paper from getting soiled in certain areas and the drum from being damaged, the drum claws oscillate front to rear on the drum surface about 8 mm. There is a projection on the rear side of the drum claw unit. A cam provided on the gear presses this projection to push the drum claw unit to the front side. When the gear rotation releases the cam, the drum claw unit is returned to its former position by the spring. Repeating this operation oscillates the drum claws. 4.3.2 Cooling around the drum II Composition/Operation
To improve the durability of the developer, the ducts [2] are provided along the drum [4] shaft to exhaust heat around the drum.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] Developing suction assembly Duct /Lw [3] [4] Suction filter Drum
1050to2022c
2 -19
PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION 4.3.3 Image stabilization control
A. Drum potential correction The drum potential is controlled to keep the image quality at a fixed level at all times, regardless of the operating environment and the number of prints. For the drum potential correction control, a latent patch is formed on the drum surface with the laser PWM set to maximum. Next the potential difference between the latent patch and the developing bias are measured to adjust the charging current, the grid voltage and developing bias potential so that this potential difference becomes a prescribed voltage at all times. See "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." II Composition/Operation (1) Execution timing When the fusing temperature is below 50C with the power switch (SW2) ON. When the prescribed conditions (number of prints, and developing theta) are met. B. Environmental decision control The temperature of the environment in which the main body is installed is detected by the drum temperature sensor (TH5), and the environmental humidity is detected by the humidity sensor mounted in the printer control board (PRCB). Data thus detected are used as information to keep the image quality at a fixed level. See "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing When the prescribed conditions are met with the SW2 ON. C. Drum rotation control When printing is interrupted under a high humidity environment, and under the environments of low humidity and a normal humidity, the surface sensitivity is different between the drum surface that is in contact with the developing unit and the cleaning unit and the drum surface that is in touch with nothing. When printing is made in a condition like this, uneven printing is made in the sub scan direction of the paper. To prevent this, the drum is rotated at a fixed cycle for a prescribed period of time to obtain a uniform surface sensitivity. See "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing Once every 3 minutes while in idling Once every hour while in the low power mode When the prescribed conditions are met with the SW2 ON
2 -20
CHARGING SECTION
5. CHARGING SECTION
5.1 Composition
[1]
[4]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] Item Charging method
[3]
[2]
Specification/mechanism Scorotoron (DC minus corona discharge)
1050to2023c
Discharge wire: Tungsten 0.06 mm (gold plated skin pass) x 2 Drum neutralizing method Grid control method Wire cleaning method Erase lamp (red LED) Gold-plated stainless mesh plate Cleaning member + motor
5.2
Drive
[3]
[2]
[1] [2] Charger cleaning member Charging wire [3]
[1]
Charger cleaning motor (M23)
1050to2024c
2 -21
CHARGING SECTION
5.3
5.3.1
Operation
Charging control
A. Charging wire The high voltage unit /1 (HV1) uses 24V DC to create a negative charge current to the charging wire to charge the drum. Charging output range: -350 A to - 1050 A x 2 B. Charging grid II Composition/Operation To make the discharge of the charging wire uniform, a minus (-) high voltage is sent from the high voltage unit /1 (HV1) to the charging grid. Charging grid voltage output range: -400V to -1000V 5.3.2 Wire cleaning control
A. Purpose The wire is cleaned periodically to prevent the deterioration of the discharging characteristics caused by soil adhered to the charging wire. B. Timing The charging wire is cleaned under the following conditions: With the power switch (SW2) ON, when the number of prints counted from the execution of the previous cleaning is in excess of the specified number and when the fusing temperature is below 50C. While in the print, executed after completion of each job of the prescribed print counts. After completion of the automatic replacement of the cleaning blade. NOTE The number of prints at which the cleaning operation is conducted is set by the software DIPSW in the service mode.
2 -22
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 C. Cleaning operation
CHARGING SECTION
The home position of the cleaning member is provided on the rear side of the machine. It operates as shown below.
[2] [3] [4]
[1]
[5] [6]
1050to2025c
[1] [2] [3]
Charger cleaning limit sensor (PS27) Charger cleaning home sensor (PS26) Cleaning (forward)
[4] [5] [6]
Cleaning (reverse) Home search (forward) Home search (reverse)
5.3.3
Erase lamp control
A. Purpose To neutralize the residual potential on the drum surface and to make the potential on the drum surface uniform, the erase lamp (EL) is turned on before charging. B. Timing for the erase lamp to be turned on
Drum motor CONT signal Erase lamp (EL)
[1]
[1] Drum motor ON
1050to2026c
2 -23
TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION
6. TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION
6.1 Composition
[5] [6]
[3]
[4]
[2]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Item Separation method Separation wire cleaning method Transfer assist method Transfer guide plate dirt prevention method Transfer method Transfer wire cleaning method
[1]
1050to2027c
Specification/mechanism AC/DC corona discharge Discharge wire: Oxide film tungsten 0.06 mm x 2 Cleaning member + motor Transfer assist sheet + motor High voltage impression DC positive (+) corona discharge Discharge wire: Oxide film tungsten 0.06 mm x 1 Cleaning member + motor
2 -24
6.2
Drive
A. Transfer/separation cleaning drive
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050to2028c
[1] [2]
Transfer/separation cleaning motor (M20) Transfer wire/separation wire
[3]
Transfer cleaning member/separation cleaning member
B. Transfer assist sheet drive
[2]
[1]
[1] Transfer assist motor (M19) [2] Transfer assist sheet assembly
1050to2029c
2 -25
6.3
6.3.1
Operation
Transfer guide control
A. Purpose To prevent the transfer guide plate from getting soiled, a minus (-) DC voltage is sent from the high voltage unit / 2 (HV2). Voltage: -500V B. Timing II Composition/Operation The voltage sent to the transfer guide plate is made in sync with the ON/OFF of the drum motor (M2). 6.3.2 Transfer/separation control
A. Transfer The high voltage unit /2 (HV2) uses 24V DC to generate a plus (+) DC current to the transfer wire to discharge electricity. Transfer DC output range: 60 A to 800 A B. Separation For separation, an AC current and a minus DC current are used. The high voltage unit /2 (HV2) sends these currents to the separation wire to discharge electricity. Separation AC output range: 500 A to 1400 A Separation DC output range: 0 A to - 300 A 6.3.3 Transfer exposure lamp control
A. Purpose The transfer exposure lamp (TSL) is turned on to enhance the transferability and prevent the reverse charge to the drum. B. Timing The transfer exposure lamp (TSL) turns ON a specified period of time after the paper leading edge sensor (PS41) turns ON, and it turns OFF a specified period of time after the registration sensor (PS40) turns OFF. C. Lighting control The TSL switches the light intensity according to the process speed and the paper weight. However, when paper weight more than 162 g/m2 is selected, the TSL does not turn on.
2 -26
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 6.3.4 Transfer assist control
A. Purpose To enhance the transferability on the entire rear side of paper, the transfer assist sheet presses up the entire rear side of paper to get it in contact securely with the drum while in the transfer on the rear side. However, the size of paper to be operated must be larger than 297 mm (A3/A4) in the main scan direction (default for metric area), and larger than 279 mm (11 inches) (default for inch area). B. Timing The paper pressing operation of the transfer assist sheet is controlled so that the pressing operation is only made when paper is provided to prevent the transfer assist sheet from getting contact with the drum. The ON/ OFF timing of the pressing operation varies according to each of the line speeds. (1) ON timing The transfer assist sheet turns ON at a specified distance after the leading edge of paper passes through the transfer guide. This ON timing is based on the point at which the paper leading edge sensor (PS41) turns ON. (2) OFF timing The transfer assist sheet turns OFF short of a specified distance before the trailing edge of paper passes through the transfer guide. This OFF timing is based on the point at which the paper leading edge sensor (PS41) (PS41) turns OFF. (3) Others When paper is found mis-centered more than 5 mm by the centering sensor (PS54), no pressure operation is made (to prevent the drum from being damaged). The pressing operation is made only when the copy is being made on the second side of the paper. However, the weight of paper is in excess of 91 g/m2, the pressing operation is not made even while in the copy on the second side of the paper. The paper width to which the transfer assist sheet is applicable is limited. When printing paper the width of which is shorter than a set width, the pressing operation is not made because of the drum getting damaged. The pressing operation of the transfer assist sheet can be disabled by the software DIPSW. (DIPSW 6-2) For paper sizes other than default, see "4.5 PCS corresponding parts," in Field Service, Chapter II. II Composition/Operation
2 -27
TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION 6.3.5 Wire cleaning control
A. Purpose To prevent the deterioration of the discharge characteristics caused by toner adhering to the transfer wire and the separation wire, the wire is cleaned periodically. B. Timing The cleaning is made when the number of prints counted from the execution of the previous cleaning is in excess of the specified number with the power switch (SW2) ON, and when the fusing temperature is below 50C. II Composition/Operation While in the print, executed after completion of each job of the prescribed print counts. NOTE The number of prints at which the cleaning operation is conducted is set by the software DIPSW in the service mode. C. Cleaning operation The home position of the cleaning member is provided on the front of the machine. It operates as shown below.
[1] [3] [4]
[2]
[5] [6]
1050to2324c
[1] [2] [3]
Transfer/separation limit sensor (PS39) Transfer/separation home sensor (PS38) Cleaning (going)
[4] [5] [6]
Cleaning (returning) Home search (going) Home search (returning)
2 -28
6.4
6.4.1
PCS correspondence
Transfer assist sheet by paper sizes
A. Purpose For the transfer assist sheet, the sizes of paper that can be used is limited. It does not function when a paper size is not appropriate. However, it is possible to use paper other than the standard size by replacing the transfer/separation charger unit in accordance with the user specifications. B. Usage Other than the standard size of the transfer assist sheet, the following sizes are available. However, when changing to any other size than the standard, it is required to add a new relay wiring harness and a size detection connector. It is possible to use different transfer assist sheets. On that occasion, in addition to the relay wiring harness mentioned above, it is necessary to purchase a transfer assist sheet that is built in to the transfer/separation charger unit. Unit Type Wire color of the size detection connector Transfer/separation charger unit Used exclusively for A3, A4 Used exclusively for 11 in. Used exclusively for 8K, 16K Used exclusively for B4, B5 Used exclusively for 8.5 in. Used exclusively for A4R, A5 Used exclusively for 8, 8.125, 8.25 in. B5R Transfer assist sheet assembly Used exclusively for A3, A4 Used exclusively for 11 in. Used exclusively for 8K, 16K Used exclusively for B4, B5 Used exclusively for 8.5 in. Used exclusively for A4R, A5 Used exclusively for 8, 8.125, 8.25 in. Used exclusively for B5R Brown Red Orange Yellow Pink Blue Purple Gray Default size for metric area Default size for inch area Default size for metric area Default size for inch area Remarks II Composition/Operation
NOTE When different sizes are used, the size detection connector is required for the transfer/separation charger unit. The unit must be changed by the user himself, and it is necessary to give appropriate guidance and explanation to the intended user.
2 -29
DEVELOPING UNIT
7. DEVELOPING UNIT
7.1 Composition
[4]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] method Item
[3]
[2]
[1]
Specification/mechanism
1050to2400c
Developer agitation/conveyance Developer agitation/conveyance method Developing roller spiking restriction method Developing method
Agitator screw (2) + agitator plate (1) Agitator plate (with 6 blades) Developer regulation blade 2 components developing method (Developer: toner + carrier) Developing roller (2 components reverse magnetic brush) Developing bias impressed: - 300V to - 800V
2 -30
DEVELOPING UNIT
7.2
Drive
[5]
[1] [6]
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] [3] Gear for the agitator screw Belt Gear for the agitator plate [4] [5] [6]
[2]
Gear for the developing roller Developing motor (M3) Coupling for the developing drive
1050to2401c
2 -31
DEVELOPING UNIT
7.3
7.3.1
Operation
Flow of developer
Developer in the developing unit is supplied to the developing roller [3] by the agitator plates [2] and its level is kept at a fixed height by the developer regulation blade [5]. Developer that remains on the developing roller is returned to the agitator screws [1]. There are 2 agitator screws equipped. The agitator plate furthest from the developing roller is used to stabilize the charging characteristics of toner supplied to the developing unit.
[4]
[5]
[3]
[1] [2] [3] Agitator screw Agitator plate Developing roller
[2]
[4] [5] Drum
[1]
[2]
1050to2402c
Developer regulation blade
2 -32
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 7.3.2 Developing bias
DEVELOPING UNIT
A. Purpose During developing, a developing bias voltage is sent to the developing sleeve so that toner is ready to adhere to the drum.
[2]
[1]
1050to2319c
[1]
Developing bias pin
[2]
Developing bias shaft
B. Timing To prevent unnecessary carriers from adhering to the drum, developing bias turns ON a specified period of time before charging is ON, and it turns OFF a specified period of time after charging is OFF.
2 -33
DEVELOPING UNIT 7.3.3 Developing suction
A. Purpose The developing suction fan (FM5) [1] is provided to suction toner being scattered around the developing unit and the drum and recover it to the suction filter [4] in the developing suction assembly [2]. B. Flow of air
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
1050to2403c
[1] [2]
Developing suction fan (FM5) Developing suction assembly
[3] [4]
Duct Suction filter
C. Developing suction fan control While in the warm up and the print, the developing suction fan (FM5) turns ON when the drum motor (M2) turns ON, and it turns OFF a specified period of time after the M2 turns OFF.
2 -34
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 7.3.4 Image stabilization control
DEVELOPING UNIT
A. Toner density control The toner density control detects the patch density in images written and developed under fixed conditions and adjusts either the speed of rotation of the developing roller or the toner supply time depending on the findings obtained by comparing it to the reference value. For particulars, see "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing Once every specified number of prints after the power switch (SW2) is turned ON. B. Maximum density correction control The maximum density correction control is a control in which the patch, in images written under a fixed condition is developed while changing the speed of rotation of the developing roller. The resulting developed patch densities are compared to a reference density and when the developed patches are the same density as the reference patch, the developer roll speed is memorized. For particular, see 18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL. (1) Execution timing When the fusing temperature is below 50C with the SW2 ON. When the prescribed conditions (number of prints, and developing theta) are met. C. Gamma correction control The gamma correction control detects the patch density in images written and developed under a fixed condition, and adjusts the amount of laser beam PWM while writing depending on the findings obtained by comparing the patches with the reference value. For particular, see "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing When the fusing temperature is below 50C with SW2 ON. When the prescribed conditions (number of prints, and developing theta) are met. II Composition/Operation
2 -35
TONER SUPPLY SECTION
8. TONER SUPPLY SECTION

8.1 Composition
[5]
[6] [3] [4]
[2] [1]
1050to2035c
Symbol [1]
Item Toner replenishment method Toner bottle
Specification/mechanism Toner capacity: 1600 g Bottle size: 155 mm x 427 mm
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Toner intermediate supply method Toner conveyance method Toner/air separation method Toner/air mixing method Toner supply method
Intermediate hopper Toner remaining sensor Twin air conveyance (toner pump motor + air pump motor) Separation by means of toner own weight + air bleed Mixing in the cup section Toner remaining sensor (used to detect an error) Large capacity hopper Toner capacity: 1700 g Toner remaining sensor x 2
2 -36
8.2
Drive
A. Toner bottle/large capacity hopper drive
[6]
1050to2325e
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1] [2] [3]
Toner bottle motor (M16) Gear for the large capacity hopper agitator shaft Mixing section agitator shaft gear
[4] [5] [6]
Toner hopper motor (M7) Gear for the toner bottle rotation shaft Toner bottle
2 -37
TONER SUPPLY SECTION B. Intermediate hopper/air separation drive
[5] [1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[2]
1050to2326c
[1] [2] [3]
Air separation motor (M10) Gear for the intermediate hopper section agitator shaft Intermediate hopper motor (M11)
[4] [5]
Gear for the rotary valve Gear for the air separation section agitator shaft
2 -38
8.3
8.3.1
Operation
Toner conveyance control
A. Purpose The toner supply section of the intermediate and low speed machines is equipped near the developing unit. For the high speed machine that deals with a large number of prints, a toner supply section of a large capacity is required and it is not possible to secure a sufficient space near the developing unit. So, it is inevitable to place the toner supply section in a location away from the developing unit. As a result, because of the distance up to the toner supply section having to be extended, an toner conveyance mechanism to deal with the long distance is required. As a toner conveyance device for the long distance, this machine employs the air conveyance method using the toner pump and the air pump. B. Toner conveyance path II Composition/Operation
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Toner put in from the bottle [1] is conveyed to the large capacity hopper [2] by the agitator operation. When the toner supply operation starts, toner is guided to the mixing section [3], where it is mixed with air from the air pump [5]. Toner mixed with air is conveyed to the air separation section [6] by the pressure from the toner pump [4]. Toner conveyed to the air separation section drops off by its own weight to be separated from the air. Toner separated from the air at the air separation section is conveyed to the intermediate hopper [7] by means of the agitator operation. When the toner supply operation starts, toner in the intermediate hopper is conveyed to the developing unit [8] by means of the agitator operation.
7. Finally, air passing through the air separation section is sent to the mixing section by the air pump. In this manner, a toner conveyance path is formed that circulates between the large capacity hopper and the developing unit.
[6]
[5]
[4] [1]
[7] [3] [8]
[2]
1050to2038c
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Toner bottle Large capacity hopper Mixing section Toner pump
[5] [6] [7] [8]
Air pump Air separation section Intermediate hopper Developing unit
2 -39
TONER SUPPLY SECTION C. Pump control (1) Configuration
In both the toner pump and the air pump, the diaphragm [2] is reciprocated by the toner pump motor (M28) or the air pump motor (M29) to circulate air in the pump room [3]. In this manner, air in the pump room is pressurized to be output.
[7] [6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
1050to2039c
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Motor Diaphragm Pump room Output air
[5] [6] [7]
Input air Pump encoder sensor Encoder
(2) Control Each pump motor is equipped with the pump encoder sensor to monitor the speed of the motor. When the pump motor is turned ON, if the speed of the motor fails to get to 85% of the prescribed speed within a specified period of time, this is deemed to be an error. While in operation, if a low speed rotation below a prescribed value is detected a specified number of times in succession, this is deemed to be an error.
2 -40
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 8.3.2 Toner supply control
A. Purpose When it is determined that toner supply is required as a result of the toner density control, toner is supplied. The intermediate hopper receives recycled toner from the cleaning section and a new toner from the air separation section. The intermediate hopper mixes these and supplies them to the developing unit. B. Timing Toner is supplied when the trailing edge of paper in printing is detected. The toner supply time varies depending on the result of the toner density control and the paper size. This is normally controlled between 0 to 0.55 sec. 8.3.3 Toner remaining detection II Composition/Operation
A. Toner remaining detection The intermediate hopper section is equipped with the toner remaining sensor /1 (PS31) [1] and the large capacity hopper [4] equipped with the toner remaining sensors /2 (PS32) [2], /3 (PS33) [3] and /4 (PS34) [5]. Depending on the ON/OFF condition of the PS31, the PS32 and the PS33, the toner level is displayed on the operation panel. (1) Sensor position
[6]
[5]
[2] [4] [3]

[4] [5] [6]
[1]
1050to2040c
[1] [2] [3]
Toner remaining sensor /1 (PS31) Toner remaining sensor /2 (PS32) Toner remaining sensor /3 (PS33)
Large capacity hopper Toner remaining sensor /4 (PS34) Mixing section
2 -41
TONER SUPPLY SECTION (2) Toner remaining display Display on the operation board
PS31 PS32 PS33
ON ON ON
ON OFF ON
ON OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF

1050to2041c
*1
However, the determination is finally made a specified period of time after the toner supply door is closed.
(3) Error detection When SC23-14 or SC-23-17 of the error codes that are related to the toner supply occurs, the machine gets into an error latch condition. Be sure to repair the defective part before setting the software DIPSW3-1 to 0. Setting the DIPSW3-1 to 0 without repairing the defective part may cause toner to overflow in the inside and the outside of the machine. B. Detection timing (1) Timing The detection timing is as described below: When the power switch (SW2) is turned ON. When the front doors /Ft and /Rt, and the toner supply door are opened and closed. At all times when the printing. (2) Toner bottle When the toner bottle is rotated, toner moves to the exit of the bottle [1] along the spiral groove carved on the surface of the bottle. When the bottle exit turns to the bottom, toner flows into the large capacity hopper [2].
[1]
[3]
B A
[2]
1050to2042c
[1] [2]
Exit Into the large capacity hopper
[3]
Rotated to 90
2 -42
CLEANING/RECYCLE SECTION
9. CLEANING/RECYCLE SECTION
9.1 Composition
[1]
[4]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] Item Drum cleaning method Toner collection method with a brush Toner collection method Toner recycle method
[3]
[2]
1050to2043c
Specification/mechanism Counter method + cleaning blade (2 pcs., replaced automatically) + weight plate Toner guide brush Screw Screw
2 -43
9.2
Drive
A. Cleaning/recycle drive
[1]
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] Gear for the toner guide brush Drum motor (M2)
[2]
[3] [4] Gear for the toner recycle screw
1050to2044c
Gear for the toner conveyance screw
B. Cleaning blade drive
[4]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1] [2] Wire Pulley for the cleaning blade [3] [4] Blade release arm Blade motor (M22)
1050to2045c
2 -44
9.3
9.3.1
Operation
Cleaning operation
A. Assist mechanism Toner scraped off by the cleaning blade [2] is collected by the toner guide brush [4] and guided to the toner conveyance screw [5]. At this time, toner remaining on the toner guide shaft [7] is scraped off by the toner collection scraper [6].
[2] [7]
[6] [5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Cleaning blade /1 Cleaning blade /2 Drum Toner guide brush
[4]
[5] [6] [7]
[3]
Toner conveyance screw Toner collection scraper Toner guide shaft
1050to2046c
2 -45
[1]
CLEANING/RECYCLE SECTION B. Automatic replacement of the blade
The cleaning section is equipped with 2 cleaning blades. The 2nd cleaning blade pushes up the blade release arm [3] as the blade motor (M22) [1] rotates. At this time, the wire wound around the cleaning blade shaft is taken up to rotate the cleaning blade shaft and change the cleaning blades /1 and /2. Automatically changing these 2 cleaning blades lengthens the maintenance cycle.
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
1050to2047c
[1] [2]
Blade motor (M22) Blade sensor /1 (PS24)
[3] [4]
Blade release arm Blade sensor /2 (PS25)
C. Blade pressure release operation To enhance the increased durability of the drum and the cleaning blade, the cleaning blade conducts the pressure release operation to the drum by the blade motor (M22). The M22 operates in accord with the ON/OFF of the drum motor (M2). The pressure release and the replacement position of the cleaning blade are controlled by the blade sensor /1 (PS24) and the blade sensor /2 (PS25). D. Blade set mode As an operation conducted after replacing the cleaning blade for the maintenance purpose, there is the blade set mode in the service mode. Executing the blade set mode prevents the curling-up of the cleaning blade by cleaning the drum with the cleaning blade after letting toner adhere to the drum. NOTE Be sure to avoid the use of this mode other than when replacing the cleaning blade. Otherwise, the cleaning blade count of the fixed parts count is reset and the automatic changing of the blades is not made at the correct timing.
2 -46
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 9.3.2 Toner collection mechanism
A. Purpose The toner collection mechanism is provided to reuse toner scraped off by the cleaning blade. B. Timing The toner guide brush used to collect toner is driven by the drum motor (M2), and the toner collection operation is made in accordance with the ON/OFF operation of the M2. 9.3.3 Toner conveyance operation II Composition/Operation
A. Toner conveyance mechanism Collected toner collected is conveyed to the recycle section by the toner conveyance screw of the cleaning section. The recycle section conveys this toner to the intermediate hopper by the toner recycle screw. B. Timing The toner conveyance screw and the toner recycle screw are driven by the drum motor (M2), and this operation is conducted in accordance with the ON/OFF operation of the M2. 9.3.4 Image stabilization control
A. Black band creation control In order to provide lubrication of the cleaning blade while in the low printing ratio, and to prevent the deterioration of toner while in the increasing driving distance, the laser is turned on at prescribed intervals to create black band patterns on the drum. For particular, see "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing 3 times every 5 prints
2 -47
PAPER FEED SECTION
10. PAPER FEED SECTION

10.1 Composition
[5] [6]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Item Paper separation method /1 Paper size detection method Paper separation method /2 Paper empty detection method Paper pick-up method Paper lift method Air assist fan Specification/mechanism
1050to2300c
Main scan direction detection: Volume resistance Sub scan direction detection: Photo sensor Torque limiter + separation roller + electromagnetic clutch Photo sensor Self-weighting roller + solenoid Wire driven horizontal up/down
2 -48
PAPER FEED SECTION
10.2 Drive
10.2.1 Tray lift drive
[6] [6] [7] [1]
[2]
[5]
[7]
[3]
[4]
1050to2301c
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Lift release coupling gear Paper lift motor /1 (M25), /2 (M26) Torque restriction gear (oil damper) One-way gear
[5] [6] [7]
Paper lift plate Lift wires /Fr1, /Rr1 Lift wires /Fr2, /Rr2
2 -49
PAPER FEED SECTION 10.2.2 Paper feed drive
[1] [2] [10] [9]
M4
[3] [8]
[4] [5] [7]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Paper feed clutch /1 (CL4), /2 (CL6) Coupling Separation clutch /1 (CL5), /2 (CL7) Tray rear section Tray central section [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[6]
1050to2302c
Torque limiter Separation roller Pick-up roller Belt Paper feed roller
2 -50
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 10.2.3 Pick-up drive
PAPER FEED SECTION
[2]
[1]
1050to2303c
[1]
Pick-up solenoid /1 (SD3), /2 (SD4)
[2]
Pick-up roller
2 -51
PAPER FEED SECTION
10.3 Operation
10.3.1 Up/down control A. Up operation The paper lift motors /1 (M25) and /2 (M26), cause the lift wires to be taken up by the pulley to raise the paper lift plate. B. Down operation When pulling out the tray, the coupling gear [3] that transmits the drive force from the motor shaft [2] of the II Composition/Operation paper lift motors /1 (M25) and /2 (M26) to the pulley is disengaged by the release lever [1]. The paper lift plate goes down slowly by its own weight through the torque restriction gear [4] that is activated only while in the down operation.
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1] [2] Release lever
[1]
[3] [4] Coupling gear
[1]
1050to2304c
Motor shaft of the paper lift motors /1 (M25), /2 (M26)
Torque restriction gear
C. Operation timing When the tray is set, the paper lift motors /1 (M25) and /2 (M26) turn ON to raise the paper lift plate. When the upper limit sensors /1 (PS6) and /2 (PS12) turn ON, M25 and M26 stop. When PS6/PS12 turn OFF from ON during the print operation, M25/M26 turn ON again. When the paper lift plate is raised until the PS6/PS12 turn ON, M25/M26 turn OFF again.
2 -52
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 10.3.2 Size detection control
PAPER FEED SECTION
There are 2 types of the paper size detection: detection in the main scan direction and detection in the sub scan direction. For size detection in the sub scan direction, the detection is made by a pair of the paper size sensors. Tray /1 is detected by /Fr1 (PS4) [4] and /Rr1 (PS5) [3], and tray /2 detected by /Fr2 (PS10) [4] and /Rr2 (PS11) [3]. When the paper rear guide [6] is moved, the detection cams /Up [1] and /Lw [2] of a different form are pressed by the knob [5]. According to the position of the paper rear guide, the paper size sensors /Fr1 [4], Fr/2 [4] and Rr/1 [3], /Rr2 [3] turn ON/OFF. II Composition/Operation
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1] [2]
1050to2305c
[1] [2] [3]
Detection cam /Up Detection cam /Lw Paper size sensors /Rr1 (PS5), /Rr2 (PS11)
[4] [5] [6]
Paper size sensors /Fr1 (PS4), /Fr2 (PS10) Knob Paper rear guide
2 -53
PAPER FEED SECTION
Paper size A5, B5, A4, 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5 x 11* B5R, A4R, 8.5 x 11R* 12 x 18, F4* B4, A3, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17 II Composition/Operation OFF OFF ON ON
Paper size sensor /Fr1 (PS4), /Fr2 (PS10) /Rr1 (PS5), /Rr2 (PS11) OFF ON ON OFF
The size in the main scan direction is detected by the paper size VR/1 (VR2) and /2 (VR4) that are interlocked with the paper guide, and the main body is informed of it a specified period of time after the tray is set. For the resistance value, a default is set by "Tray Adjustment" in the service mode. * For the paper sizes shown below, it is necessary to set the paper size on the operation panel. Make a selection from among A5 and 5.5 x 8.5. Make a selection from among A4R and 8.5 x 11R. Make a selection as F4 from among 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13 and 8.5 x 13.
2 -54
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 10.3.3 Pick-up mechanism
PAPER FEED SECTION
Paper is picked up when the pick-up solenoids /1 (SD3) and /2 (SD4) turn OFF. When the SD3/SD4 turn OFF, the pick-up roller goes down and pressurizes paper by its own weight. When the paper feed clutches /1 (CL4) and /2 (CL6) turn ON, the pick-up roller rotates to convey the paper to the paper feed roller.
[3]
Paper feed sensors /1 (PS7), /2 (PS13) Paper feed motor (M4) Paper feed clutches /1 (CL4), /2 (CL6) Pick-up solenoids /1 (SD3), /2 (SD4)
[5]
[1]
[1] [2] [3] Start button ON
[2]
[4] [5]
[4]
1050to2306c
Pick-up of the 2nd sheet of paper Conveyance of the 2nd sheet of paper
Pick-up of the 1st sheet of paper Conveyance of the 1st sheet of paper
2 -55
PAPER FEED SECTION 10.3.4 Separation mechanism
For the transmission of the drive force to the separation roller [4], the drive force of the paper feed motor (M4) is transmitted by the ON/OFF operation of the separation clutches /1 (CL5) and /2 (CL7) through the torque limiter [3]. The separation roller [4] is driven in the direction opposite to the paper conveyance. However, when no paper is conveyed, and when only one sheet of paper is conveyed, the frictional force generating between the paper feed roller [1] and the separation roller [4] or the paper and the separation roller is greater than the frictional force of the torque limiter [3]. Accordingly, the separation roller rotates in the direction of the paper conveyance to convey paper to the vertical conveyance section. II Composition/Operation When 2 or more sheets of paper are conveyed, the frictional force between these sheets of paper is smaller than the frictional force of the torque limiter and the separation roller rotates in the reverse direction to prevent the lower most paper from being conveyed.
[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Paper feed roller Separation clutches /1 (CL5), /2 (CL7) Torque limiter Separation roller [5] [6] [7] 2nd sheet of paper 1st sheet of paper Pick-up roller
1050to2307c
A. Separation clutch control When paper is slippery (or, when the power for conveyance is insufficient), paper conveyed from the pick-up roller may be unable to pass through the separation sections of the paper feed roller and the separation roller. To alleviate a condition like this, turn OFF the separation clutches /1 (CL5) and /2 (CL7) until paper gets to the separation section to cut off the drive force to the separation roller, and make it function as a driven roller to the paper feed roller. After paper gets to the separation section, turn ON the CL5 and CL7 to conduct the normal operation. However, this control should be conducted as follows: Type of paper:Coated paper B: Conducted unconditionally. of conveyance at the separation section. Type of paper:Those other than the coated paper B: Conducted automatically judging from the condition
2 -56
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 10.3.5 Air assist mechanism
PAPER FEED SECTION
The trays /1 and /2 are provided with the paper feed assist fan that assists the paper separation by blowing air [4] on paper [3] from the paper guides, 1 provided at front and rear. The tray /1 is provided with the paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM20) [2] and /Rr1 (FM21) [1] and tray /2 with paper feed assist fans /Fr2 (FM22) [2] and /Rr2 (FM23) [1]. Each paper feed assist fan is effective mainly for thick paper and highly adhesive paper (coated paper). However, in the case of plain paper, it may not be fed smoothly.
[1] [2]
1050to2309c
[1] [2]
Paper feed assist fans /Rr1 (FM21), /Rr2 (FM23) Paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM20), /Fr2 (FM22)
[3] [4]
Paper Blow-out of air
A. Operation timing The operation of the paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM20), /Rr1 (FM21), /Fr2 (FM22) and /Rr2 (FM23) can be selected from among the following three modes: Always ON, Always OFF and Auto. In the Auto mode, the paper assist fan is normally OFF. However, when the conveyance time from the start of the paper feed to the paper feed sensors /1 (PS7) and /2 (PS13) is in excess of the specified time period, or when a no-feed jam condition occurs, the paper feed assist fan of the corresponding tray turns ON from then on. However, when a paper type other than the coated paper B is set and the separation roller functions as a driven roller to the paper feed roller by the control of the separation clutch, the paper feed assist fan remains OFF to prevent the multi feed of paper. The operations in the Auto mode can be reset by pulling out the tray (except for pulling out of the tray while in a jam), or turning OFF the power switch.
2 -57
[3]
[4]
PAPER FEED SECTION 10.3.6 Paper empty detection control
The paper empty detection in the tray is made by the paper empty sensors /1 (PS8) and /2 (PS14). 10.3.7 Remaining paper detection control
The remaining paper detection is made by the remaining paper VR/1 (VR1) and /2 (VR3) [1] that are interlocked through the pulley [2] and the gear with the paper lift plate [3]. The level of the paper remaining is detected in five steps according to the resistance value and sent to the main body after being AD converted. At this time, the following are displayed on the operation panel: II Composition/Operation 1st step (displayed in red): 10% or less 1st step (displayed in white): 25% or less 2nd step (displayed in white): 25 to 50% 3rd step (displayed in white): 50 to 75% 4th step (displayed in white): 75 to 100%
[4]
[1] [3]
[2]
[1] [2] Remaining paper VR/1 (VR1), /2 (VR3) Lift pulley /Rr [3] [4]
[1]
Paper lift plate Lift wire
[2]
1050to2310c
2 -58
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 10.3.8 Tray lock control
PAPER FEED SECTION
Each tray is locked by the tray lock lever. When the handle release sensors /1 (PS9) and /2 (PS15) of either of the tray /1 and /2 are OFF, the tray lock solenoids /1 (SD1) and /2 (SD2) of the corresponding tray turn on and the tray lock lever is pulled up to release the lock, thus allowing you to pull out the tray. And when PS9 is OFF SD1 is turned ON, PS15 turning OFF will not turn on SD2. This is to prohibit two trays from being pulled out at the same time. When a jam occurs that affects the tray and the exit conveyance section, the tray remains locked until the jammed paper is removed. Doing this prevents the paper from being torn. 10.3.9 Dehumidification heater control II Composition/Operation
The tray /1 and the tray /2 are provided with the dehumidification heater /1 (HTR1) and /2 (HTR2), 1 each respectively, below each tray. They are turned on when the dehumidification heater switch (SW3) of the main body is turned ON.
2 -59
1050ma02e.fm Page 60 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:23 PM
PAPER FEED SECTION
10.4 PCS corresponding parts

10.4.1 Corresponding to additional prints As parts corresponding to additional prints, the following are available. Cleaning brush Paper feed assist plate A. Cleaning brush (1) Purpose II Composition/Operation When performing overlay printing (see chapter III "6.5 Overlay printing adjustment" in the Field Service) on coated paper on which offset printing has been made, the conveyance force of the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller is remarkably reduced by powder that is used to prevent the blocking (back transfer) while in the offset printing, thus causing a no feed jam. The cleaning brush is a part used to remove this powder to realize the improved feedability of paper. Since it is used while in the overlay printing, it can be installed only in the tray 4 of PF-701 that is used while in the overlay printing. The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller can be cleaned with the brush. Do not use the cleaning brush for the paper with many paper powders. The cleaning brush may be clogged by the paper powder and the conveyance power may be reduced. (2) Composition The package of a set contains the following: [1] Brush main body: [2] Positioning screw: [3] Screw: 1 pc. 2 pcs. 2 pcs. (M3 x 6)
Only one brush is packaged with this machine. When required additionally, brushes can be purchased as service parts.
[1]
[2]
[3]
1050to2311c
2 -60
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 B. Paper feed assist plate (1) Purpose
PAPER FEED SECTION
The paper feed assist plate increases the pressure on the pick-up roller and it is used to adjust the pick-up pressure on paper. Adjustments can be made according to the types of paper to allow the increased paper feedability. It is possible to improve a no feed condition that is apt to occur when a highly adhesive paper like coated paper is fed. A paper feed assist plate weighs about 10g. One pick-up roller can be attached with 4 plates normally (See chapter V "5. PAPER SETTING" in the Field Service) and 8 plates while in the overlay printing (See chapter III "6.5 Overlay printing adjustment" in the Field Service). Increasing or decreasing the number of plates allows the adjustment of the pick-up roller according to the type of paper. (2) Composition The package of a set contains the following: [1] Paper feed assist plate: [2] Screw: purchased as service parts. 4 pcs. 2 pcs. (M3 x 8) II Composition/Operation
Only 4 paper feed assist plates are packaged together with the main body. When required additionally, can be
[1]
[2]
1050to2312c
2 -61
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION
11. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION

11.1 Composition
[1]
[2]
[6]
1050to2314c
Symbol [1] [2]
Item Paper dust removing method Registration correction method
Specification/mechanism Paper dust guide brush forced drive Creation of a roller stopper loop
2 -62
11.2 Drive
[17] [16] [1] [2]
[4] [5] [14]
[6] [7]
[8]
[9]
[13]
[10] [12] [11]

1050to2315c
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
Toner guide brush Scraper shaft Conveyance roller /1 Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL1) Pre-registration roller /1 Vertical conveyance clutch (CL2) Conveyance roller /2 Belt Conveyance roller /3
[10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17]
Pre-registration clutch /2 (CL3) Pre-registration roller /2 Coupling (transmission of driving force to tray /2) Belt Paper feed motor (M4) Coupling (transmission of driving force to tray /1) Vertical conveyance motor (M8) Conveyance exit roller
2 -63
[15]
[3]
11.3 Operation
11.3.1 Pre-registration control When the paper feed starts, paper is sent out to the pre-registration roller by the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller. When the paper strikes the pre-registration roller that is stopped, a loop is formed to adjust paper skew. When the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL1) and /2 (CL3) turn on, the driving force of the paper feed motor (M4) is transmitted to the pre-registration rollers /1 and /2 to convey paper. 11.3.2 II Composition/Operation Conveyance control
Paper fed from the tray /1 is conveyed to the conveyance roller /1 which is also driven by the vertical conveyance motor (M8) by the pre-registration roller /1. Paper fed from the tray /2 is conveyed to the conveyance rollers /3 and /2, which are in turn driven by the pre-registration roller /2 and the paper feed motor (M4) through the vertical conveyance clutch (CL2), and then conveyed finally to the conveyance roller /1. Since the line speeds of the pre-registration rollers /1 and /2 and the conveyance rollers /3 and /2 that are driven by the M4 are fixed at a high speed, the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL1) and /2 (CL3), and the CL2, while in the transfer/conveyance in a low speed, are turned off to cut off the transmission of the driving force. At this time, the conveyance roller /1 driven by the M8 rotates at a low speed. However, it starts to rotate in a high speed when the loop sensor (PS16) detects the trailing edge of paper. 11.3.3 roller /1. 11.3.4 Paper dust removing mechanism Exit conveyance control
For the exit conveyance, the vertical conveyance motor (M8) drives the conveyance exit roller and conveyance
At the exit of the vertical conveyance section, paper dust is removed by means of the paper dust guide brush. When paper dust adhering to the conveyance exit roller is removed by the paper dust guide brush (raising brush), it then adheres to the scraper shaft (metal roller) to be removed by the scraper (sheet) that touches the scraper shaft.
2 -64
REGISTRATION SECTION
12. REGISTRATION SECTION

12.1 Composition
[1] [4]
[3]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] Item Multi feed detection method
[2]
[1]
Specification/mechanism Multi feed sensor Loop roller + motor Creation of a roller stopper loop Contact image sensor (200 dpi equivalent)
1050to2049c
Paper skew adjustment method Registration method Mis-centering detection method
2 -65
12.2 Drive
A. Registration roller drive
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050to2050c
[1] [2]
Registration roller /Up Registration roller /Lw
[3]
Registration motor (M17)
B. Loop roller drive
[2]
[1]
1050to2051c
[1]
Loop motor (M18)
[2]
Loop roller
2 -66
12.3 Operation
12.3.1 Multi feed detection control To detect the multi feed of paper while in the paper conveyance, the multi feed sensor is provided at the exit of the loop roller. The multi feed sensor is an acoustic sensor made up of a pair of a sender and a receiver. In this sensor, the sound wave sent from the multi feed detection board /1 (ADUDB1) is received by the multi feed detection board /2 (ADUDB2). When a single sheet of paper passes through this interval, it is possible to receive a sound wave, but when plural sheets of paper pass through, it is not possible to receive sound waves. In this way, a detection is made to check to see if paper is multi fed. However, the following paper may not be detected accurately and the multi feed detection function is turned OFF. Coated paper A and B weighing 50 to 61 g/m2 Paper weighing 210 to 300 g/m2 12.3.2 Loop control II Composition/Operation
When paper conveyed to the loop roller [1] strikes the registration rollers /Up [4] and /Lw [2], a loop [6] is formed until the loop roller turns OFF. In this way, a paper skew is adjusted. When paper is heavier than 162 g/m2, it has a stronger repulsive force and there may occur a transfer jitter due to the increased partial line speed caused by the force by which the loop tends to go back to its original form. Therefore, it is controlled so that the loop amount becomes smaller than that of the paper of 161 g/m2. A. Registration path
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[2]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Loop roller Registration roller /Lw Paper leading edge sensor (PS41) Registration roller /Up [5] [6] [7]
[1]
Registration sensor (PS40) Loop ADU deceleration sensor (PS42)
1050to2052c
2 -67
REGISTRATION SECTION B. Registration operation
[1]
Loop motor (M18) Registration motor (M17) ADU deceleration sensor (PS42) II Composition/Operation Registration sensor (PS40)
[2]
[3]
1050to2053c
[1] [2]
Start button ON Loop creation
[3]
Registration starts
12.3.3
Paper mis-centering adjustment control
To detect the mis-centering of paper after registration, the centering sensor (PS54) is provided at the exit of the registration roller. The PS54 is a contact image sensor of about 200 dpi and the mis-centering information detected by the PS54 is processed at the image processing section and adjusted prior to writing so that the image data corresponds to the position. The mis-centering amount can be adjusted up to 5 mm. When the mis-centering amount is in excess of 5 mm, paper is output with no adjustment made. 12.3.4 Paper leading edge timing adjustment control
To detect the paper leading edge timing after registration, the paper leading edge sensor (PS41) is provided at the exit of the registration roller. Based on the paper leading edge position detected by the PS41, adjustments are made prior to writing so that the image data corresponds to the position.
2 -68
HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE
13. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE

13.1 Composition
[2]
[1]
1050to2054c
Symbol [1] [2]
Item Paper conveyance method Conveyance assist method Belt conveyance
Specification/mechanism Duct + fan suction
13.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
1050to2055c
[1]
Belt
[2]
Conveyance motor (M5)
2 -69
13.3 Operation
13.3.1 Conveyance control A. Conveyance suction The duct [2] provided at the center of the conveyance section sucks paper passing through the conveyance section to convey it. One suction opening [1] is normally provided at the center of the conveyance section. When trouble occurs with the conveyance due to an insufficient paper suction force, it is possible to increase the suction force by adding suction openings, 1 each at front and rear, with the duct cover [3] removed. This adjustment is made when transfer jitter occurs. For particulars of the adjustment procedure, see chapter III II Composition/Operation "6.4 Transfer jitter adjustment" in Field service.
[2]
[3]
[1]
1050to2056c
[1] [2]
Permanent suction opening Duct
[3]
Duct cover
2 -70
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 B. Duct path
The duct [1] in the conveyance section [3] is connected to a duct that serves also as the transfer/separation charger unit at the back of the device. This duct uses the transfer/separation suction fan (FM4) [2] to suction toner scattering around the transfer/separation charger unit and the conveyance section and discharges the exhaust outside of the main body.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1] [2] Duct Transfer/separation suction fan (FM4) [3] Conveyance section
1050to2320c
C. Fan control The transfer/separation suction fan (FM4) turns ON while in the copy.
2 -71
ADU
14. ADU
14.1 Composition
[1]
1
2 [1]
Symbol [1] Item ADU conveyance method
3 [1]
Specification/mechanism Conveyance rollers + motor
[1]
1050to2058
14.2 Drive
[7] [8] [9] [10]
[6]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] ADU exit roller
[5]
[4]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050to2059
ADU conveyance motor /1 (M15) ADU reverse roller ADU reverse motor (M12) ADU conveyance motor /2 (M16) Loop motor (M18)
ADU conveyance roller /4 ADU conveyance roller /3 ADU conveyance roller /2 ADU conveyance roller /1
2 -72
ADU
14.3 Operation
14.3.1 A. Conveyance control
Non-stack ADU paper feed mechanism
Paper conveyed from the reverse/exit section is conveyed to the ADU by the reverse/exit roller [4] and the ADU reverse roller [5]. When the ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46) [2] detects the trailing edge of paper and turns OFF, the ADU reverse roller rotates in the reverse direction to send paper back in the direction in which it was conveyed. At this time, the paper is conveyed to the ADU conveyance roller /1 [1] side, not to the reverse/exit roller side, according to the form of the metal frame of the conveyance path. In this manner, each sheet of paper is turned over and reversed and conveyed without being stacked in the ADU. While in this paper conveyance, the ADU reverse sensor /2 (PS45) [6] detects the trailing edge of paper to decide the reverse timing of the ADU reverse roller. II Composition/Operation
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[2] [3]
[1]
1050to2060
[1] [2] [3] [4]
ADU conveyance roller /1 ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46) ADU reversed paper Reverse/exit roller
[5] [6] [7]
ADU reverse roller ADU reverse sensor /2 (PS45) ADU paper supplied
2 -73
FUSING SECTION
15. FUSING SECTION

15.1 Composition
[1]
[2] [7] [3] [4]
[5] [6]
1050to2316c
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Fusing method
Item Fusing roller /Up cleaning method Fusing roller /Up heating method Fusing roller /Lw heating method Fusing heating roller cleaning method Neutralizing method Separation method
Specification/mechanism Cleaning web (non-woven cloth + silicon oil) Pressurized heat roller method Halogen lamp x 2 (main/sub) External heating by means of the halogen lamp (x 1) of the fusing heating roller Scraper Non-contact neutralizing brush Fusing claws
2 -74
FUSING SECTION
15.2 Drive
15.2.1 Web drive
[1] [2] [8]

1050to2317c
[3] [4]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Web motor (M24) Web unwinding shaft Pressure roller Cleaning web
[5] [6] [7] [8]
Fusing roller /Up Paper conveyance direction Web wind-up direction Web wind-up shaft
15.2.2
Fusing drive
[1] [2]
[5] [4]
[1] [2] [3] Fusing motor (M1) Flywheel Fusing heating roller [4] [5]
[3]
Fusing roller /Lw Fusing roller /Up
1050to2318c
2 -75
FUSING SECTION
15.3 Operation
15.3.1 Fusing roller drive control A. Speed changeover control According to the relationship between the type of paper and the paper weight, the process speed is controlled at a high speed (490 mm/s), medium speed (425 mm/s) and low speed (290 mm/s). B. Preparative rotation control (1) Control when the power is turned ON II Composition/Operation When the fusing temperature is below 50C with the power switch (SW2) turned ON and the detection temperature of the thermistor /1 (TH1) of the fusing roller /Up gets to a specified temperature, the fusing motor (M1) starts a preparative rotation and stops after a specified period of time or when the TH1 detect a specified temperature. The software DIPSW allows you to make a selection between the execution and the non-execution of this preparative rotation and to change the preparative rotation time. (2) Print control When printing on coated paper (62 g/m2 to 91 g/m2) or fine paper (50 g/m2 to 91 g/m2), and the start button is turned ON, the temperature of the thermistor /1 (TH1) is detected. When this temperature is in excess of a set temperature, M1 is rotated to cool down the temperature of the fusing roller. When the detected temperature is cooled down nearly to the set temperature, printing is started. A decision to conduct the preparative rotation control or not can be made in the utility mode. C. Speed stabilization To stabilize the speed, the gear shaft between the M1 and the fusing roller /Up is equipped with a flywheel. The inertia force of the flywheel stabilizes the speed of the fusing roller to minimize the transfer jitter on thick paper. D. Periodic rotation To prevent transfer jitter caused by the deformation of the fusing roller /Lw, a periodic rotation is made at a fixed intervals while in standby. (1) Execution timing Once every 6 hours after the specified conditions are met 15.3.2 form. Web drive control
The rotation time of the web motor (M24) is controlled so that the web advance distance per print becomes uni-
2 -76
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 15.3.3 Fusing temperature control
FUSING SECTION
The heating of the fusing roller /Up is made by the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) and the heating of the fusing roller /Lw made by the fusing heater lamp /3 (L4) through the fusing heating roller. The surface temperature of the fusing roller /Up is detected at fixed intervals by thermistor /1 (TH1) [1] provided at the center, and controlled by turning ON/OFF the L2 and the L3 through the AC drive board (ACDB) so that it becomes a prescribed temperature. In the same manner, the surface temperature of the fusing heating roller is detected at fixed intervals by thermistor /3 (TH3) [2] provided at the center and the temperature of the fusing heating roller is controlled by turning ON/OFF L4. II Composition/Operation
1050to2323c
[2]
[1]
[1]
Thermistor /1 (TH1)
[2]
Thermistor /3 (TH3)
A. Warm-up The fusing heater lamps /1 (L2), /2 (L3) and /3 (L4) turn ON while in the warm-up, and they turn OFF at a prescribed temperature. B. While in the print For the fusing roller /Up, the temperature setting varies according to the type of paper and the paper weight. When the temperature comes to a prescribed temperature, the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) are turned ON/OFF for control. For the fusing heating roller, the fusing heater lamp /3 (L4) is turned ON/OFF so that the surface temperature remains at a fixed value. C. While in standby The fusing roller /Up is heated by fusing heater lamp /1 (L2) when the temperature is 1C lower than a prescribed temperature (this varies depending on the time elapsed after completion of the warm-up). L2 turns OFF when the temperature is 2C higher than a prescribed temperature. The fusing heating roller is heated by the fusing heater lamp /3 (L4) when the temperature is 1C lower than a set temperature, and lamp /3 (L4) turns OFF when the temperature is 1C higher than a set value. The heater lamp /2 (L3) is for flicker, and does not turn ON.
2 -77
FUSING SECTION D. Power save
The fusing roller /Up is heated by fusing heater lamp /1 (L2) when the temperature is 1C lower than a prescribed temperature (fixed) and turns OFF L2 when it is 2C higher than a prescribed value for control. The fusing heating roller is heated by fusing heater lamp /3 (L4) when the temperature is 1C lower than a prescribed temperature (fixed) and turns OFF lamp /3 (L4) when it is 1C higher than a prescribed temperature for control. The heater lamp /2 (L3) is for flicker and does not turn ON. 15.3.4 II Composition/Operation Thick paper conveyance control
To prevent transfer jitter or a paper jam that is apt to occur when a double sided thick paper is used, the entrance guide plate can be moved by the thick paper assist solenoid (SD8). When paper length is less than 280 mm and the weight is more than 92 g/m2, or paper length more than 280 mm and more than 210 g/m2 is selected, the entrance guide plate is brought down. 15.3.5 Protection against an error
When the thermistor / 1 (TH1) detects a prescribed temperature (210C) 5 times at specified intervals, or the thermistor /2 (TH2) detects a prescribed temperature (240C), a message will display on the operation panel, fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 ((L3) turns OFF and copy operations stops. Thermostat /1 (TS1) also monitors an abnormal temperature rise. TS1 cuts off the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) at a temperature of 180 7 C. When the thermistor /3 (TH3) detects a prescribed temperature (220C) 5 times at specified intervals, or the thermistor /4 (TH4) detects a prescribed temperature (240C), a message will display on the operation panel, fusing heater lamps /3 (L4) turns OFF and copy operations stop. Thermostat /2 (TS2) also monitors an abnormal temperature rise. TS2 cuts off the fusing heater lamps /3 (L4) at a temperature of 181 7 C. When TH1/TH2 does not come to a prescribed temperature (50C) a specified period of time after the main power switch (SW1) turns ON, L2/L3/L4 turn OFF and copy operations stop. When a fusing temperature abnormality like this occurs, the system gets into an SC latch condition. So, after identifying the cause of the error and repairing it, it is necessary to make the release and recovery operations with the software DIPSW 3-1.
PRCB
TH4
ACDB
RL driver section
RL1
RL1
TH3
CBR TH2
Control section TS1 L2 AC driver section
TH1
L3 TS2 L4
1050to2404c
2 -78
REVERSE/EXIT SECTION
16. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION

16.1 Composition
[1] [2]
1050to2062c
Symbol [1] [2]
Item Paper exit path switchover method Reversed paper exit method
Specification/mechanism Reverse gate + solenoid Roller switchback
16.2 Drive
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[1]
Main body paper exit roller Paper exit roller /2 Fusing exit roller Gear for the fusing roller /Up Reverse/exit roller
1050to2063c
Reverse exit motor (M13) ADU acceleration roller Paper exit roller /1 ADU acceleration motor (M14) Paper exit motor /1 (M9)
2 -79
16.3 Operation
16.3.1 Conveyance control A. Reverse gate The reverse gate is turned ON/OFF by the reverse/exit solenoid (SD7) and switches the conveyance path for paper exited from the fusing section over to either the straight paper exit or the reverse paper exit. B. Conveyance path (1) Straight paper exit II Composition/Operation While in the straight paper exit, the reverse gate is closed when the reverse/exit solenoid (SD7) turns ON. So, paper exited from the fusing exit roller [1] is conveyed to the main body paper exit roller [3] passing over the reverse gate [2].
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] Fusing exit roller Reverse gate
[2]
[1]
[3] Main body paper exit roller
1050to2064
2 -80
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 (2) Reverse paper exit
When in the reverse paper exit and the ADU paper feed, the reverse gate [6] is opened when the reverse/exit solenoid (SD7) is OFF, and paper is conveyed to the ADU acceleration roller [8]. The paper that passed through the ADU acceleration roller is conveyed to the reverse/exit roller [10] according to the shape of the metal frame. The reverse/exit roller, when the reverse sensor /1 (PS48) [9] detects the trailing edge of paper turns OFF, and then rotates in reverse to get the paper back in the original direction. While in the ADU paper feed, paper is conveyed to the ADU paper feed section passing through the reverse/exit roller. Paper sent back by the reverse/exit roller is conveyed to the paper exit roller /1 [3], not to the ADU acceleration roller along the form of the metal frame. In this way, paper is turned over to be conveyed to the paper exit roller [5] through the paper exit roller /2 [4]. While paper is being conveyed to this paper exit roller, the reverse sensor / 2 (PS47) [11] detects the trailing edge of paper to determine a reverse timing for the reverse paper exit roller. II Composition/Operation
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
1050to2065
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Paper entering the reverse section Paper exiting the reverse section Paper exit roller /1 Paper exit roller /2 Main body paper exit roller Reverse gate
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
Fusing exit roller ADU acceleration roller Reverse sensor /1 (PS48) Reverse paper exit roller Reverse sensor /2 (PS47)
2 -81
INTERFACE SECTION
17. INTERFACE SECTION

17.1 Composition
[1] [5] [2]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[7]
1050to2327c
IC side Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] Item Serial port (RS-232C) Compact flash card Parallel port (IEEE 1284 compliance) RJ45 Ethernet connector Specification/mechanism For Hyper Terminal communication, D-SUB9 pin connector For Firmware of the IC For parallel output of the printer 36 pins Centronics connector For printer, scanner
Engine side Symbol [5] [6] [7] [8] Item RJ45 Ethernet connector Serial port (RS-232C) Parallel port (IEEE 1284 compliance) USB port (USB TypeB) Specification/mechanism For Web Utilities, PS JobEditor, NetBackupTool and Mail remote notification system For CS RemoteCare For ISW of the copier/printer program 36 pins Centronics connector For ISW of the copier/printer program, Ver. 1.1
2 -82
IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL
18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL

18.1 Outline
In order to realize the top quality print images at all times, this machine conducts various types of control for image stabilization. The operation of the image stabilization control varies according to the power switch (SW2) being turned ON or the print being in operation.
18.2.1
Image stabilization control flow when the power switch (SW2) is ON
The following shows the flow of the operation of the image stabilization control when the power switch (SW2) turns ON.
Power ON
G. Environmental decision control
A. Drum rotation
B. MPC/APC
C. Drum potential correction control (charging current, grid voltage, and developing bias adjustment)
D. Maximum density control (600 dpi)
F. Gamma correction control (600 dpi)
A. Drum rotation control (1) Purpose To prevent drum charge dissipation such as an image running at a high humidity. When left unused at a low or normal humidity, to prevent an uneven density due to the difference in sensitivity between the cleaning unit area and the developing unit area on the drum. (2) Method When the fusing temperature is below 50C with the power switch (SW2) ON, rotate the drum for 2 minutes 30 seconds, 30 seconds after completion of the charger cleaning operation during warm up. Then conduct the potential correction control, the maximum density control and the gamma correction control. When the fusing temperature is above 50C with the SW2 ON, and machine has been left unused for a long period of time, conduct the following operations based on the environmental decision values previously obtained. When at a high humidity, 1 minute after the SW2 turns ON, check the machine if it is in the fusing warm-up condition. When it is not in the Ready condition, rotate the drum for 2 minutes. When the fusing warm-up condition is completed within 1 minute after the SW2 turns ON, the machine is considered to be in the Ready condition at that time and no rotation of the drum is made. When it is considered that the humidity is low or normal, rotate the drum only to 70at a fixed cycle according to the temperature and the period of time for which the machine has been left unused. The drum is rotated at 3 minutes intervals when it has been left idling, and at 1 hour intervals when it is in the low power mode.
2 -83
18.2 Operation flow
B. MPC (Max. Power Control)/APC (Auto Power Control) (1) Purpose To store the maximum power value emitted by the laser in the laser drive board (LDB) and maintain this light intensity in the APC operations. * The LDB automatically monitors the laser drive current for each line and a control operation is made so that the light intensity becomes the MPC value at all times. (2) Execution timing Executed when the power switch (SW2) is turned ON. After this, the MPC value is controlled by the dot diamII Composition/Operation eter adjustment control. C. Drum potential correction control (charging current, grid voltage, and developing bias adjustment) (1) Purpose To maintain the drum surface potential at a fixed condition at all times, without being influenced by the environmental conditions and the number of prints, the drum potential sensor (DPS) is provided for detection. (2) Method According to the measurement values of the potential after exposure, the developing bias potential and the potential before exposure the charge current, and grid voltage are controlled to the optimum values by taking into consideration the temperature and humidity, the drum counts and developer counts. The difference between the developing bias potential and the potential before exposure can be changed by the DIPSW 7-2 and 3. (3) Execution timing When the fusing temperature is below 50C with the SW2 on. Each time the job of 10,000 prints is completed after the above timing. Each time the PM counter counts up to 40,000 prints, and after completion of the job when the developing theta ratio gets to the reference value (the cycle can be changed by the DIPSW 6-5 and 6). D. Maximum density control (1) Purpose To maintain the maximum density of the image at a fixed condition at all times without being influenced by the environmental conditions and the number of prints. (2) Method Create several toner patches on the drum surface by changing the speed of rotation of the developing roller. Create these patches with the laser exposure time per dot (laser PWM) at the maximum value. Read this patch by the maximum density sensor and store the speed of rotation of the developing roller when the sensor output gets to the specified value, and create the image at this number of rotations. (3) Execution timing When the fusing temperature is below 50C with the SW2 ON. Each time the PM counter counts up to 40,000 prints, and after completion of the job when the developing theta ratio gets to the reference value (the cycle can be changed by the DIPSW 6-5 and 6).
2 -84
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 E. Simplified maximum density control (1) Purpose
To maintain the maximum density of the image at a fixed condition at all times without being influenced by the environmental conditions and the number of prints. (2) Method Create a toner patch on the drum surface, read the patch density with the maximum density sensor and change the speed of rotation of the developing roller according to the difference from the reference value. (3) Execution timing When more than 30 minutes have elapsed since the preceding job (the execution of the print, the maximum density adjustment control or the simplified maximum density adjustment control) has been made with the SW2 ON and the fusing temperature is above 50C with more than 1 minute warming-up completed. F. Gamma correction control II Composition/Operation
(1) Purpose To maintain the gradation of the image at a fixed condition at all times without being influenced by the environmental conditions and the number of prints. (2) Method Create several toner patches on the drum surface by changing the laser PWM. At this time, create a patch with the speed of rotation of the developing roller at the number decided by the maximum density control. Read this patch with the gamma sensor and create a gamma curve by arithmetic processing. (3) Execution timing When the fusing temperature is below 50C with the SW2 ON. After completion of the job when the developing theta ratio gets to the reference value. Each time the PM counter counts up to 40,000 prints, and after completion of the job when the developing theta ratio gets to the reference value (the cycle can be changed by the DIPSW 6-5 and 6). G. Environmental decision control (1) Purpose To detect the ambient temperature and humidity and feed back the findings to the various types of controls to maintain the image at a fixed quality. (2) Method The temperature sensor and the humidity sensor are provided inside the machine. (3) Execution timing With the power switch (SW2) ON, environmental decisions based on the measurement values are made only when it is considered that the machine has been left unused for more than 8 hours after the SW2 was turned OFF last time and the fusing temperature is below 50C.
2 -85
IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL 18.2.2
Image stabilization control flow while in the print and during idling
The following shows the flow of the image stabilization controls taken while in the print and during idling.
Start button ON
Start of print
A. Toner density control

B. Black belt control
End of print
Drum potential adjustment control
Drum potential adjustment control
C. Dot diameter correction control
Maximum density adjustment control
Gamma correction control
Standby a: After completion of the last job for every 40,000 prints b: After completion of a job exceeding 10,000 prints after the power switch (SW2) turns on (with the fusing temperature below 50C)
2 -86
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 A. Toner density control (1) Method
Develop a toner patch on the drum once for every 5 prints after the SW1 turns ON, and read the patch density with the maximum density sensor. When the patch density is lower than the reference value, the operation varies depending on the developing theta (developing roller line speed/drum line speed). a. When the developing theta is lower than the reference value: Increase the number of rotations of the developing roller according to the patch density. b. When the developing theta is at the reference value: Drive the intermediate hopper motor (M11) only for the period of time calculated based on the patch density and the paper size, and replenish toner. B. Black belt creation control (1) Purpose To prevent deterioration of toner and stabilize the load on the cleaning blade, coat the entire drum image area with toner before cleaning the cleaning with blade. (2) Method Fluctuate the black belt creation width between 0.25 mm (much toner in supply) and 20 mm (little toner in supply). The minimum value of the black belt creation width can be changed by the DIPSW 6-3 and 6-4. (3) Execution timing The belt is created at the frequency of 3 times per 5 prints. C. Dot diameter correction control (1) Purpose To prevent the change in the diameter of a laser 1 dot due to the write system being soiled or the change in developing performance, and to obtain a stable image quality for a long period of time. (2) Method Create multiple dot pattern patches of a fixed density on the drum by changing the laser power value. At this time, create the patches while changing the MPC value with the laser PWM maximum. Read this dot pattern patch with the gamma sensor and store as the MPC value the laser power value obtained when the sensor output gets to the prescribed value. Until the next adjustment, use this selfing as the MPC value. (3) Execution timing After completion of a job of every 40,000 prints on the PM counter, and after completion of a job when the developing theta comes to the reference value. (The cycle can be changed by the DIPSW 6-5 and 6-6.) II Composition/Operation
2 -87
IMAGE PROCESSING
19. IMAGE PROCESSING

19.1 Image processing in the scanner section
A. Shading correction
B. AE control
C. Area discrimination
D. Brightness/density conversion
E. Filter/magnification
F. Density gamma (conversion)
G. Half tone processing (error diffusion)
H. Tilt adjustment
I. Compression
J. Storage of image data
2 -88
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 19.1.1 Shading correction
IMAGE PROCESSING
This is the measure to obtain an even distribution from light of the CCD. The following corrections are made at the prescribed timing. a. White correction
The output voltage of each pixel of the CCD sensor when the white reference plate is exposed to the exposure lamp is stored as the maximum output of the pixel. b. Black correction II Composition/Operation The output voltage of each pixel of the CCD sensor when the exposure lamp is turned off is stored as the minimum output of the pixel. Conduct calculation to find out what step in this range falls on the image data read from the original based on the difference between the black and white data for each pixel stored in the steps a. and b. above, and output the results of the calculation in the 10 bits accuracy.
[1] +3 0V
Voltage at which the read is made White
Width in which the read is made After shading correction
Black
[2] 255 0
White
Width in which the read is made
Black
1050to2328c
[1]
AD conversion input
[2]
Shading correction output
2 -89
IMAGE PROCESSING 19.1.2 properly. A. Sampling area (1) While in the platen mode AE control
Through the AE control, a density suitable for the original density is automatically selected and the copy is made
[1]
[1] 30 mm
1050to2014c
(2) While in the DF print
[2] [1]
[1] 4 mm [2] 1 mm
1050to2015c
B. Execution timing While in the platen print : At the pre-scan before the actual scan when the print or the read starts. While in the DF print : At the same time as when the original is read.
2 -90
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 19.1.3 Area discrimination
IMAGE PROCESSING
To make a copy of the original under the correct condition (to make a correct filter processing), check the read section to see if it is a character or a dot picture, and use the results at the image processing unit at the later stage. 19.1.4 Brightness/density conversion
The signal obtained after the shading correction is a signal corresponding to the light reflected from the original, and this is generally called a brightness signal. In this brightness/density conversion section, the brightness signal is converted in density as shown in the graph below. II Composition/Operation Brightness
255
Density
1024
1050to2331c
2 -91
IMAGE PROCESSING 19.1.5 Filter/magnification
A. Filter processing An appropriate filter processing is made according to the type of an original and the magnification selected. (1) Character (2) Dot section (3) Picture : Make the shading of an original conspicuous. : Suppress moire. : Increase the reproducibility of gradation.
B. Magnification processing II Composition/Operation For this machine, the sub scan direction magnification is made by the scan speed of the exposure unit (platen mode) or by the conveyance speed of the DF (DF mode), and the main scan direction magnification is made by processing images electrically. (1) Main scan magnification processing while in enlargement As shown in the drawing below, if the data of each pixel obtained when the original is read by the CCD are D1 to D5, the positions of the data read when enlarged are E1 to E5. However, when the write is made only with the data thus read, the following problems occur. a. b. There occurs a clearance between data, and this results in a distored image. The data position does not fall in exactly with the write position.
As shown with dotted lines in the drawing below, when there is no read data that corresponds exactly to the write position, a density is decided for the write as shown below and appropriate processing is made.
[1]
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
[2]
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
[3]
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
1050to2332c
[1] [2]
Position at which the original is read Data position while in enlargement
[3]
Write position
2 -92
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 (2) Main scan magnification processing while in reduction
IMAGE PROCESSING
As shown in drawing below, if the data of each pixel obtained when the original is read by the CCD are D1 to D5, the positions of the data read when reduced are R1 to R5. They are overlapping each other and do not correspond to the write position. Therefore, a density is decided for the write as shown below and an appropriate processing is made.
[1]
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
[2]
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
[3]
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
1050to2333c
[1] [2]
Position at which the original is read Data position while in enlargement
[3]
Write position
(3) Density adjustment With the density shown in the axis of coordinate and the position shown in the axis of abscissas, when E2-E1 in the drawing of "(1) Vertical magnification while in enlargement" is shown in 16 steps in the direction of the axis of abscissas, the following drawing is obtained. When the position to the written data W2 is "l," the density S can be obtained in the following expression. S = E1 + {(E2 - E1) / 16} x l
255
E2 W2 S
Density
E1
0 0
Position
15
1050to2334c
2 -93
IMAGE PROCESSING 19.1.6 Scanner gamma correction
To the data obtained after the filter/magnification processing, select a density curve corresponding to the density button selected on the operation panel. An appropriate density curve is provided for each of the character/picture/character and the picture/thin character modes. 19.1.7 Halftone processing (error diffusion)
To make effective use of the installed memory and obtain an excellent copy image, error diffusion processing is employed, which is one of the pseudo-intermediate processing methods. II Composition/Operation 19.1.8 Tilt adjustment
DF original skew auto adjustment Detect an uneven original skew amount for each DF original by the original skew sensors /Fr (PS312) and /Rr (PS311) and adjust the skew amount detected by the sensors by rotating the image data while in the image processing. 19.1.9 pressed. Two types of memories are provided. (Main memory: 256 MB, Sub memory: 64 MB) A part of the hard disk is used as an extended memory of the above. In this manner, more than 10,000 pages can be stored in the average word processor documents. 19.1.10 Storage of image data The image/setting of the originals read by the scanner or the images sent from the IC can be stored as a file in the hard disk in the main body. Compression
To store more image data, data is stored temporarily in the image memory after the images has been com-
2 -94
IMAGE PROCESSING
19.2 Image processing in the write section

A. Rotation/elongation
B. SGU
C. 2dotPWM
D. PWM
E. Frequency conversion
A. Rotation/elongation Rotate the image in the direction of 90 degrees and 180 degrees as necessary. When outputting images from the memory, expand the compressed data to restore them to their original state. B. SGU The SGU is a function to generate various types of test patterns. C. 2dotPWM The laser writing is made normally in 1bitED (2-value error diffusion), but in the picture mode, 2bitED (4-value error diffusion) is employed to increase the gradation. (A change can be made between 1bit and 2bit by the DIPSW 11-5.) Since 2bitED reproduces the gradation in 4 values, small diameter laser dots are employed. However, since the drum surface potential in the small dot section is unstable, a dot is reproduced by the mean value of 2 adjoining dots to realize a smooth image. D. PWM The period of time the laser is turned ON is changed by changing the pulse width. E. Frequency conversion Write in the memory once the data after the PWM conversion and read it in accord with the write clock signal of the printer.
2 -95
OTHERS
20. OTHERS
20.1 Other fan controls
20.1.1 Composition
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24] [1]
[17]
[2] [3] [4]
[15]
[16]
[5] [6]
[14]
[7] [8] [13]
[12] [11] [10]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] Cooling fan /3 (FM3) Polygon cooling fan (FM18) Suction fan /1 (FM6) IC cooling fan (FM24) Suction fan /2 (FM7) Developing suction fan (FM5) Power supply cooling fan /1 (FM25) Power supply cooling fan /2 (FM26) Suction fan /3 (FM8) Power supply cooling fan /3 (FM27) ADU cooling fan /2 (FM15) ADU cooling fan /1 (FM14) [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] Registration cooling fan (FM14) Sensor cooling fan (FM16) ADU cooling fan /3 (FM13) Transfer/separation suction fan (FM4) Paper exit cooling fan /1 (FM9) Paper exit cooling fan /2 (FM10) Paper exit cooling fan /3 (FM28) Scanner cooling fan (FM19) Pump cooling fan (FM11) Cooling fan /1 (FM1) Cooling fan /2 (FM2) IPB cooling fan (FM12)
[9]
1050to2069c
2 -96
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 20.1.2 Operation
OTHERS
A. Cooling fans /1 (FM1), /2 (FM2) and /3 (FM3) (1) Purpose To exhaust around the drum and the fusing unit. (2) ON timing Turns ON (rotates at a low speed) after completion of the first warm-up with the power switch (SW2) turned ON. Turns ON (rotates at a low speed) in concert with the drum motor (M2) being turned ON while in warming up. Rotates at a low speed while in idling, and rotates at a high speed when the drum temperature is in excess of a prescribed temperature. Rotates at a high speed at all times while in the print and rotates at a low speed specified period of time after completion of the print. Rotates at a low speed at all times while in the low power mode. (3) OFF timing After completion of the warm-up, does not turn OFF until the power switch (SW2) is turned OFF. B. Transfer/separation suction fan (FM4) (1) Purpose To exhaust the transfer/separation charger unit and the conveyance section. (2) ON timing Turns ON in concert with the drive of the drum while in warming up. Rotates at a fixed speed at all times while in the print. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF at all times while in idling and in the low power mode. C. Developing suction fan (FM5) (1) Purpose To collects toner scattered around the developing unit. (2) ON timing Turns ON in concert with the drive of the drum while in warming up. Rotates at a fixed speed at all times while in the print. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF at all times while in idling and in the low power mode. II Composition/Operation
2 -97
OTHERS D. Suction fan /1 (FM6) (1) Purpose Cool down around the write section with suction. (2) ON timing
Rotates at a low speed while in warming up after the power switch (SW2) turns ON. Rotates at a low speed while in idling. Rotates at high speed at all times while in the print and rotates at a low speed specified period of time after completion of the print. II Composition/Operation Rotates at a low speed at all times while in the low power mode. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 being turned OFF. E. Suction fans /2 (FM7) and /3 (FM8) (1) Purpose To cool down around the developing unit and the drum unit with suction. (2) ON timing Turns ON in concert with the drive of the drum while in warming up. Rotates at a fixed speed at all times while in the print. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF while in idling and in the low power mode. F. Paper exit cooling fan /1 (FM9)
(1) Purpose To cool down around the paper exit section with suction. (2) ON timing Rotates at a high speed at all times while in the print. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF at all times while in warming up, idling and in the low power mode. G. Paper exit cooling fans /2 (FM10) and /3 (FM28) (1) Purpose To cooling down paper that is being exited with suction. (2) ON timing Rotates at a fixed speed at all times while in the print. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF at all times while in warming up, idling and in the low power mode.
2 -98
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 H. Pump cooling fan (FM11) (1) Purpose To cool down around the toner pump and the air pump with suction. (2) ON timing Rotates at a high speed at all times while in the print. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF at all times while in warming up, idling and in the low power mode. I. IPB cooling fan (FM12)
OTHERS
(1) Purpose To exhaust heat in the image processing board. (2) ON timing Rotate at a fixed speed at all times after the power switch (SW2) turns ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF. J. ADU cooling fan /1 (FM14)
(1) Purpose To cool down around the ADU drive board /2 (ADUDB2). (2) ON timing Rotates at a fixed speed at all times after SW2 turns ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF. K. ADU cooling fan /2 (FM15) (1) Purpose To cool down the inside of the ADU. (2) ON timing Rotates at a fixed speed at all times after SW2 turns ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF. L. ADU cooling fan /3 (FM15) (1) Purpose To cool down around the reverse/exit section. (2) ON timing Rotates at a fixed speed at all times after the power switch (SW2) turns ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF.
2 -99
OTHERS M. Sensor cooling fan (FM16) (1) Purpose To cool down around the ADU drive board /1 (ADUDB1). (2) ON timing Rotates at a fixed speed at all times after SW2 turns ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF. II Composition/Operation N. Registration cooling fan (FM17) (1) Purpose To cool down around the registration unit. (2) ON timing Rotates at a fixed speed at all times after SW2 turns ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF. O. Polygon cooling fan (FM18) (1) Purpose
To cool down around the polygon motor (M21) and the write section. (2) ON timing Turn ON at all times after the power switch (SW2) turns ON. (3) OFF timing Does not turn OFF until the power switch (SW2) is turned OFF. Turns OFF in concert with the polygon motor while in the low power mode. P. Scanner cooling fan (FM19)
(1) Purpose To cool down around the exposure lamp (L1) and the scanner. (2) ON timing Turns ON a specified period of time after the exposure lamp (L1) turns ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with L1 turning OFF. Q. IC cooling fan (FM24) (1) Purpose To cool down the inside of the IC board. (2) ON timing Turns ON (rotates at a fixed speed) in concert with the power switch (SW2) turning ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF.
2 -100
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 R. Power supply cooling fans /1 (FM25) and /2 (FM26) (1) Purpose To cool down the DC power supply 1 (DCPS1). (2) ON timing Turns ON (rotates at a fixed speed) in concert with the power switch (SW2) turning ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF. S. Power supply cooling fans /3 (FM27) (1) Purpose To cool down the DC power supply 2 (DCPS2). (2) ON timing Turns ON (rotates at a fixed speed) in concert with the power switch (SW2) turning ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF.
OTHERS
2 -101
OTHERS
20.2 HDD control

20.2.1 Composition
[1]
[2]
1050to2070c
Symbol [1]
Item Hard disk /1 (HDD1) Capacity: 40 GB
Specification/mechanism Hard disk for the main body Storage of formatted stamp, watermark and registered overlay image data Storage of image data Temporary storage of image data (image memory)
[2]
Hard disk /2 (HDD2)
Hard disk for the IC controller
20.2.2
Backup
Using the NetBackupTool allows the data in the hard disk /1 (HDD1) to be backed up to the PC.
2 -102
OTHERS
20.3 Counter control

20.3.1 Composition
OACB
PRCB
OB3
ACDB
LCDB
CNT1
CNT2
PS3
1050to2071c
20.3.2
Operation Name Function/method Displays the cumulative number of copies in all copy modes. Mechanical counter driven by the electronic signal. Counts up for each paper exit signal.
Total counter (CNT1)
Electronic counter
Displays the cumulative number of copies/prints on the operation panel. PM count/cycle, data collection *1, and copy count by parts that are required to be replaced. Counts up for each paper exit signal.
Key counter (CNT2) (Optional)
Counter that disables the copy operation when the specified number of copies is made. Mechanical counter driven by the electronic signal.
*1
The following data are collected. Total count by paper sizes Copy count by paper sizes Print count by paper sizes Large size count ADF passage count Pixel ratio block data Pixel ratio job data Time series jam data Jam occurrence count Count by copy modes Time series SC data SC occurrence count Block jam occurrence count Block SC occurrence count
2 -103
OTHERS A. Status indicator light
Installing a status indicator light allows the machine status to be monitored at a place away from the machine according to the condition of the light.
1050to2335c
Connector Pin No. 1 2 3 160 4 5 6
Signal name PAT1 PAT2 PAT3
Description Light turn-on signal available
Output timing L signal output when the print is L signal output while the scanner or the print in operation L signal output while in an abnormal stop due to a jam, error code, no paper or no toner
Type of signal Open corrector
PAT4 24V P.GND 24V DC power source Power ground
L signal output while a toner supply warning is being displayed At all times 24V, 500mA
NOTE A signal is output from the PAT3 when an error code occurs. However, the light does not turn on since the power source of the 24V status indicator light is cut off.
2 -104
OTHERS
20.4 Parts that operate when the power switch is turned ON

20.4.1 Parts that operate when the main power switch is turned ON A. Composition
PF-701 HTR1 HTR2 HTR3
T2
SW3
T1
CBR NF1 NF2
SW1 DCPS1
5VDC
RL2 L
RL3
DCPS2
SW2 RL1 Fusing Section OACB

5VDC
OB3
OB1 OB2
1050to2072c
are intended only for overseas. B. Operation When turning ON the main power switch (SW1), the AC power source is supplied to the DC power source /1 (DCPS1). In this manner, DCPS1 generates 5V DC and 12V DC and supplies them to the overall control board (OACB) and image processing board (IPB). OACB supplies this DC power source to the operation board /1 (OB1) through the operation board /3 (OB3) and put the power switch (SW2) in the standby for input. The AC line is provided with a circuit breaker (CBR) which cuts off the AC line by itself when an excessive current flows due to a short circuit while in SW1 ON.
2 -105
HTR1
HTR2
OTHERS
Blank page
2 -106
SERVICE MANUAL
Theory of Operation
DF-603
2004.10 Ver. 1.0
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
See the main body service manual on page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 I Outline II Composition/Operation
OUTLINE
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Originals other than those that paper feed and throughput can be guaranteed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Originals not allowed to be fed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Combination of mixed originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. UNIT COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 3. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
II
1.1 1.2 1.3 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6 2.1 2.2 2.3 Size detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Pick-up mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Separation mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Multi feed detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Original empty detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Registration control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
1. PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 3.1 3.2 3.3 Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Mixed original mode control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Z-fold original mode control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Skew adjustment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Cooling fan control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
3. REVERSAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 3.3.1 3.3.2 4.1 Reverse mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Registration control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
4. PAPER EXIT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
CONTENTS 4.2 4.3 I Outline
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
4.3.1
Paper exit mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
ii
I OUTLINE
1.1
Type: I Outline : 103 sheets/min. (8.5 x 11 size) Double sided copy mode : 65 sheets/min. (A4/8.5 x 11 size) Original feed layout: Original image read position: Resolution: Set with the front side up, at center as standard Dedicated slit glass section 600 dpi
df603to1001c
Type
Double sided original auto feeder Sheet-through type original auto feeder
Name:
1.2
Functions
Inch: 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R, A3, B4, A4, B5, B5R, A5, A5R Metric: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8 x 13 Maximum original size: 297 x 431.8 Minimum original size: 128 x 139.7
Original size:
Original stacking capacity: Original read speed
100 sheets, max. (80 g/m2) Single sided copy mode : 105 sheets/min. (A4 size)
1.3
Type of paper
High-quality paper of 50 g/m2 to 130 g/m2 In the case of the single sided copy mode, however, high-quality paper of 131 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 is also available in the single feed mode. Amount of curling: Up to 10 mm with 5 originals overlapped one another
Original
Amount of curling
1.4
Originals other than those that paper feed and throughput can be guaranteed
With the following originals, no severe problems are found such as frequent jams and major damage to the originals, although it is not possible to obtain a numeric value indicating reliability that can be specified in product guarantee terms: Recycled paper, straw paper, heat sensitive paper, originals fed in the mixing of perforated original mode, high-quality paper of 35 g/m2 to 50 g/m2, irregular-sized originals (such as CF originals), coated paper, originals with a rough surface (such as letterhead), folded originals (Z-folded or folded in two)
1 -1
1.5
I Outline
Originals not allowed to be fed

OHP film, blueprint master, label paper, offset master, bonded original, high-quality paper of 35 g/m2 to 201 g/m2
The following originals are not allowed to be used:
1.6
Combination of mixed originals
Combinations of the same and different size originals is available. The following table shows the available combination of mixed originals. Metric:Europe Reference original (original with a maximum width) A3 Other originals A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R A5 B5R A5R X X X X X X X X X A4 B4 B5 A4R A5 B5R A5R
Inch Reference original (original with a maximum width) 11 x 17 Other 11 x 17 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 11R 8.5 x 5.5 8.5 x 5.5R X X X X X originals 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 11R 8.5 x 5.5 8.5 x 5.5R
1 -2
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Taiwanese
Reference original (original with a maximum width) A3 Other originals A3 A4 8K 16K A4R A5 16KR A5R : Single size X X : Same size X X X X X X : Different size X: Mixing not allowed : Cannot be set A4 8K 16K A4R A5 16KR A5R I Outline
1.7
Maintenance
Same as the main body. Same as the main body.
1.8
Machine data
24V/5.1V DC (supplied from the main body) 210W or less W 650 mm x D 570 mm x H 170 mm Approx. 22 kg
Power source: Maximum power consumption: Dimensions: Weight:
1.9
10C to 30C 10% RH to 80% RH (with no condensation)
Temperature: Humidity:
1 -3
UNIT COMPOSITION
2. UNIT COMPOSITION
I Outline
[7]
[8]
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
[6]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Original feed tray Original exit tray (for large size) Original exit section (for small size) Original exit tray (for small size)
[5]
[5] [6] [7] [8] Reverse section
df603to1002c
Original exit section (for large size) Conveyance section Original feed section
1 -4
PAPER PATH
3. PAPER PATH
I Outline A. Single sided copy mode (small size)
[1]
[2]
[4]
[1] [2] Original feed tray Original exit tray (for small size)
[3]
[3] [4] Exit gate
df603to1003c
Image read position (slit glass section)
B. Double sided copy mode (small size) (1) Front scan
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[3] [4] Exit gate
df603to1004c
1 -5
PAPER PATH (2) Rear scan
I Outline
[1]
[2] 1
2 [4]
3 [3]
[3] [4] Exit gate Image read position (slit glass section)
df603to1005c
(3) Paper exit
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] [2] Original feed tray Original exit tray (for small size) [3] Exit gate
df603to1006c
1 -6
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 C. Single sided copy mode (large size)
PAPER PATH
[2]
[4]
[1] [2] Original feed tray
[3]
[3] [4] Exit roller
df603to1007c
Original exit tray (for large size)
D. Double sided copy mode (large size) (1) Front scan
[1]
[2]
[4]
[1] [2] Original feed tray Original exit tray (for large size)
[3]
[3] [4] Exit gate
df603to1008c
1 -7
I Outline
[1]
PAPER PATH (2) Rear scan
I Outline
[1]
[2]
2 [4]
3 [3]
[3] [4] Exit gate Image read position (slit glass section)
df603to1009c
(3) Paper exit
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[3] [4] Exit gate Exit roller
df603to1010c
1 -8
PAPER FEED SECTION
1.1 Composition
[1] [2]
[5]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[4]
Item
[3]
df603to2001c
Specification/mechanism Guide plate + VR Photo sensor Up/down plate + motor Ultrasonic sensor Roller + motor
Original size detection in the main scan direction Original size detection in the sub scan direction Original feed tray up/down method Multi feed detection Registration method
2 -1
PAPER FEED SECTION
1.2
Drive
A. Tray up/down drive
[1]
[2]
df603to2002c
[1]
Up/down plate
[2]
Tray up/down motor (M303)
B. Paper feed drive
[5] [1]
[2] [4]
[3]
[1] [2] [3] Registration roller Original feed motor (M302) SDF switching solenoid (SD301) [4] [5] Pick-up roller Paper feed roller
df603to2003c
2 -2
PAPER FEED SECTION
1.3
1.3.1
Operation
Size detection control
A. Plain original mode (1) Size detection in the main scan direction The front and rear dimensions of the original are detected according to the position of the guide plate connected to the original size VR (VR301). (2) Size detection in the sub scan direction The right and left dimensions of the original are detected according to the ON/OFF combination of the original size sensor /Rt (PS302) and the original size sensor /Lt (PS303). B. Mixed original mode (1) Size detection in the main scan direction The front and rear dimensions of the maximum mixed original are detected according to the position of the VR301 guide plate. (2) Size detection in the sub scan direction The conveyance roller [3] rotates in the forward direction to convey the original to the paper exit tray (for large size) [2]. The conveyance roller stops rotation a specified period of time after the original registration sensor /Rt (PS318) [1] detects the trailing edge of the original. At this time, depending on the ON time period of the PS318, the conveyance direction and the size of the original are detected. II Composition/Operation
[1]
[2]
[3]
df603to2004c
2 -3
PAPER FEED SECTION
A specified period of time after the original registration sensor /Rt (PS318) [1] turns off, the conveyance roller [3] rotates in the reverse direction to get the leading edge of the original conveyed to the paper exit section back to the scan standby position [5]. The trailing edge of the original returned is conveyed to the paper exit tray (for large size) [2] according to the form of the conveyance guide plate. The reverse rotation of the conveyance roller stops a specified period of time after the original conveyance sensor (PS308) [4] detects the leading edge of the original.
[1]
[2] [5]
[4] [3]
df603to2005c
After that, the same read (scan) operation as that in the normal mode is made. The original size detection operation for the second and succeeding originals varies according to a copy mode employed: the single sided copy mode or the double sided copy mode. Single sided copy mode: After the scan operation of the preceding original starts. Double sided copy mode: After the scan operation of the back side of the preceding original starts. 1.3.2 tion [1]. When the tray upper limit sensor (PS315) [4] turns ON, the M303 turns OFF to be put in the standby condition with the up/down plate left raised. The original comes into contact with the pick-up roller [3] to conduct the pick-up (paper feed) operation. Pick-up mechanism
The tray up/down motor (M303) sends up the up/down plate [2] to move the original to the pick-up roller posi-
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
df603to2006c
2 -4
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 1.3.3 Separation mechanism
PAPER FEED SECTION
A. Separation control Of the originals that have been fed by the pick-up roller, only one sheet of original is conveyed to the registration roller side by the original feed roller and the separation roller. Even when plural sheets of originals are fed, the separation roller makes a reverse rotation to convey a single sheet of original. B. SDF (single document feeder) control In the single document feeder mode, to improve the paper feedability of thick paper and other originals the paper feed of which is not guaranteed, the SDF switching solenoid (SD301) cuts off the drive of the separation roller to conduct the paper feed operation. 1.3.4 Multi feed detection control II Composition/Operation
The multi feed detection is made by using the multi feed sensor /1 (MFS1) and the multi feed sensor /2 (MFS2) which employ a method to check originals if they are multi fed based on the amount of the transmission of ultrasonic waves. The accuracy in the multi feed detection has been improved by using the multi feed sensor of the ultrasonic sensor, which supports the speed-up in the paper feed. The multi feed sensor is made up of a pair of a sender and a receiver. The following are originals the multi feed of which can be detected. Originals the main scan direction of which is in excess of 210 mm. Originals the main scan direction of which is less than 210 mm cannot be recognized due to the position of the sensor. Originals the weighing of which is between 50 g/m2 and 128 g/m2. Originals the weighing of which is beyond the range mentioned above may not be recognized even when multi fed. 1.3.5 Original empty detection control
The detection of the presence of original in the original tray section while in the scan stop is made by the original empty sensor (PS305). And also, the original empty detection while in the scan is made by the original count sensor (PS310) to stop the paper feed from the trays /1 to /5 after PS310 detects the trailing edge of the last original.
2 -5
PAPER FEED SECTION 1.3.6 Registration control
When the start button is turned ON [1], the tray up/down motor (M303) brings up the up/down plate until the tray upper limit sensor (PS315) ON on [2]. A specified period of time after the PS315 turns ON, the original feed motor (M302) is driven in a reverse rotation to convey the original to the registration roller. When the original registration sensor /Rt (PS318) turns ON, the up/down plate comes down by a fixed distance and a loop is formed until the original registration sensor /Lt (PS306) turns ON to adjust an original skew.
[1]
Tray upper limit sensor (PS315) Tray lower limit sensor (PS316) Tray up/down motor (M303) Up Down Original count sensor (PS310) Original empty sensor (PS305) Original registration sensor /Rt (PS306) Original registration sensor /Lt (PS318) Original feed motor (M302) F 800 mm/s 465 mm/s
R 550 mm/s
[2]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Start button ON Feed of the 1st sheet of paper
[3] [4]
[5]
[5] [6] [7]
[6] [7]
Feed of the 2nd sheet of paper
df603to2007c
Loop formation of the 2nd sheet of paper Pre-feed of the 2nd sheet of paper
Loop formation of the 1st sheet of paper Pre-feed of the 1st sheet of paper
2 -6
CONVEYANCE SECTION
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION
2.1 Composition
[3]
[2]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] Item Conveyance path switching method Original skew detection method Original centering detection method Photo sensor LED sensor
[1]
Specification/mechanism Flapper + solenoid
df603to2008c
2 -7
CONVEYANCE SECTION
2.2
Drive
A. Flapper up/down drive
[2]
[1]
df603to2009c
[1]
Flapper
[2]
Gate solenoid (SD303)
B. Conveyance drive
[1]
[2]
df603to2010c
[1]
Conveyance roller
[2]
Original conveyance motor (M301)
2 -8
CONVEYANCE SECTION
2.3
2.3.1
Operation
Conveyance control
The originals that have been fed up to the registration roller [1] by the separation mechanism are pre-fed by the registration roller [1] to be conveyed to the conveyance roller [2] at a high speed. A specified period of time after the original conveyance sensor (PS308) [4] turns ON, the conveyance roller [2] is switched into the scan speed to convey the original onto the slit glass (original scan position) [3].
[4]
[3]
[2]
df603to2011c
The originals are read when they passes through the slit glass [5].
2 -9
[1]
CONVEYANCE SECTION 2.3.2 Mixed original mode control
The mixed original sizes copy mode is applicable to both the same size originals and the different size originals. Since the size detection in the direction of the original feed is made according to the ON time of the original registration sensor /Rt (PS318), the size detection operation is made prior to the scan operation for each original. 2.3.3 Z-fold original mode control
In the Z-fold mode, the same detection operation as that in the mixed original sizes copy mode is made on the 1st sheet of original to determine the original size. For the 2nd and succeeding originals, the normal original conveyance is made. II Composition/Operation 2.3.4 Skew adjustment control
The original skew sensor /Rr (PS311) and the original skew sensor /Fr (PS312) are provided to make adjustments when the original is conveyed with its leading edge skewed. PS311 and PS312 are provided on the front side and the rear side of the conveyance path before scan to detect the amount of skew based on the time difference when the leading edge of the original turns ON these sensors. The amount of skew detected is adjusted by means of image processing. The relationship of the distance between the two sensors makes it effective only on original larger than A4R in width and the correction of the tilt angle up to 1.5C is made. 2.3.5 Centering adjustment
The leading edge of the original pre-fed is detected by the centering sensor /Rr (PS321) and the centering LED sensor /Rr (PS322). According to the timing of this detection, the side edge of the original is detected by the centering sensor /Fr (PS320) and the centering LED sensor /Fr (PS319) to determine the effective read area in the main scan direction. The width of the original size that can be detected is restricted only to A4 or 11 inch. However, PS320 is required to be positioned to the width of the original you want to detect. The maximum range that can be corrected is within 3 mm. When in excess of this range, only 3 mm is corrected. The centering adjustment control is invalid for original sizes other than A4 and 11 inch and in the mixed original mode. The sensor can detect any color in the original. 2.3.6 Cooling fan control
To prevent the original conveyance motor (M301) from getting too hot while in operation, the motor is cooled by the cooling fan /Lt (FM301). The cooling fan turns ON when the original feed is started, and it turns OFF when the original exit is completed. To prevent the original exit motor /1 (M304), the original exit motor /2 (M305), the RADF control board (RADFCB) and the tray up/down motor (M303) from getting too hot while in operation, these motors and board are cooled by the cooling fan /Rt (FM302).
2 -10
REVERSAL SECTION
3. REVERSAL SECTION
3.1 Composition
[1]
df603to2016c
Symbol [1] Reverse method
Item Stabilization of scan speed
Specification/mechanism Pressure roller release method Paper exit gate + solenoid
3.2
Drive
A. Reverse drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] [2] Reverse roller Original exit motor /1 (M304) [3] Reverse conveyance roller
df603to2017c
2 -11
REVERSAL SECTION B. Pressure roller release drive
[1]
df603to2018c
[1]
Pressure roller release solenoid (SD302)
3.3
3.3.1
Operation
Reverse mechanism
A. Small size original When the gate solenoid (SD303) starts up, the flapper [3] closes and originals the front of which has been scanned are conveyed [2] to the reverse section by the reverse roller [1]. A specified period of time after the original reverse sensor (PS309) [7] turns OFF by detecting the trailing edge of the original, SD303 opens the paper exit gate [6] and the reverse paper feed [5] is made while rotating in the reverse direction at a low speed and then at a high speed to guide the original to the conveyance roller [4].
[5]
[6]
[7]
[1]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] Reverse roller
[3]
[2]
[4] [5] [6] [7] Conveyance roller Reverse paper feed Paper exit gate Original reverse sensor (PS309)
df603to2027c
Conveyance to the reversal section Flapper
2 -12
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 B. Large size original
REVERSAL SECTION
When the gate solenoid (SD303) energizes, the flapper [5] is closed and the original the surface of which has been scanned is conveyed to the reversal section by the reverse roller [8]. The original conveyed to the reversal section [4], because it cannot be contained in the reversal section, is conveyed to the paper exit reversal section [2] by the reverse conveyance roller [9], the paper exit reverse roller [1]. At this time, the exit gate [10] is closed by the exit gate solenoid (SD304). The originals that have been conveyed to the reversal section and the paper exit reversal section are fed in reverse [6] in the same manner as small size originals. At this time, since the originals do not yet pass through the reverse roller [8], the reverse conveyance roller [9] even if they have reach the conveyance roller [7], after the reverse roller makes the reverse rotation, the pressure roller release solenoid (SD302) activates to release the pressure roller [3] for the reverse roller. The originals are released from the pressure roller and guided to the conveyance roller [7]. II Composition/Operation
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[1]
[6]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Reverse feed Conveyance roller Reverse roller
[2]
df603to2028c
Paper exit reverse roller Conveyance to the paper exit reversal section Pressure roller Conveyance to the reversal section Flapper
Reverse conveyance roller Exit gate
2 -13
REVERSAL SECTION 3.3.2 Registration control
A. Small size original A specified period of time after the start of the conveyance [1] of the 1st original, the front of the 1st original is read [2]. The 1st original conveyed to the reverse section stops temporarily after being accelerated by the original exit motor /2 (M305) and the original exit motor /1 (M304). M305 and M304 start a reverse rotation [3] to let the original hit against the conveyance roller for registration. For the original that has been registered, a specified period of time after the original conveyance sensor (PS308) turn ON [4], the back of the 1st original is read [5]. II Composition/Operation
[1]
Original conveyance sensor (PS308) Original convey620 mm/s ance motor F (M301) 465 mm/s V-VALID Original exit 620 mm/s motor /1 (M304) F 465 mm/s 465 mm/s R 550 mm/s 620 mm/s Reverse jam sensor (PS304) Pressure release roller solenoid (SD302) Original exit 620 mm/s motor /2 (M305) F 465 mm/s R 465 mm/s 620 mm/s Original reverse sensor (PS309) Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313) Exit gate solenoid (SD304)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
df603to2020c
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Front face of the 1st sheet of original Reading of the front face of the 1st sheet of original Reversal of the 1st sheet of original Rear face of the 1st sheet of original
[5] [6] [7]
Reading of the rear face of the 1st sheet of original Front face of the 2nd sheet of original Reading of the front face of the 2nd sheet of original
2 -14
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 B. Large size original
REVERSAL SECTION
A specified period of time after the start of the conveyance [1] of the 1st original, the front of the 1st original is read [2]. The 1st original conveyed to the reverse section stops temporarily after being accelerated by the original exit motor /2 (M305) and the original exit motor /1 (M304). M305 and M304 start a reverse rotation [3] to let the original hit against the conveyance roller for registration. For the back of the original that has been registered, a specified period of time after the original reverse sensor (PS309) turns ON, the pressure release roller solenoid (SD302) is turned ON [4] to release the pressure roller, and then release the conveyance force of the reverse section. A specified period of time after the original conveyance sensor (PS308) turns ON [5], the back of the 1st original is read [6]. II Composition/Operation
[1]
Original conveyance sensor (PS308) Original convey620 mm/s ance motor F (M301) 465 mm/s V-VALID Original exit 620 mm/s motor /1 (M304) F 465 mm/s 465 mm/s R 550 mm/s 620 mm/s Reverse jam sensor (PS304) Pressure release roller solenoid (SD302) Original exit 620 mm/s motor /2 (M305) F 465 mm/s R 465 mm/s 620 mm/s Original reverse sensor (PS309) Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313) Exit gate solenoid (SD304)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
df603to2021c
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Front face of the 1st sheet of original Reading of the front face of the 1st sheet of original Reversal of the 1st sheet of original Pressure roller release
[5] [6] [7]
Rear face of the 1st sheet of original Reading of the rear face of the 1st sheet of original Front face of the 2nd sheet of original
2 -15
PAPER EXIT SECTION
4. PAPER EXIT SECTION

4.1 Composition
A. Paper exit section (large size)
[1]
df603to2022c
Symbol [1]
Item Conveyance path switching method
Specification/mechanism Paper exit gate + solenoid
B. Paper exit section (small size)
[1]
Symbol [1] Item Conveyance path switching method Specification/mechanism Paper exit gate + solenoid
df603to2023c
2 -16
PAPER EXIT SECTION
4.2
Drive
A. Exit gate drive
[2]
[1]
[1] Exit gate [2] Exit gate solenoid (SD304)
df603to2024c
B. Paper exit drive (for large size)
[1]
[2]
df603to2025c
[1]
Paper exit roller /1
[2]
Original exit motor /1 (M304)
2 -17
PAPER EXIT SECTION C. Paper exit drive (for small size)
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] Original exit motor /2 (M305) Paper exit reverse roller [3] Paper exit roller /2
df603to2026c
2 -18
PAPER EXIT SECTION
4.3
4.3.1
Operation
Paper exit mechanism
A. Paper exit operation of small size original (1) Single sided original The originals that have been scanned are conveyed to the reversal section [3] because of the gate solenoid (SD303) being closed by the flapper [4]. The originals conveyed to the reversal section are conveyed to the exit gate [7] by the reverse roller [5], the reverse conveyance roller [6]. After that, they are conveyed to the paper exit roller /2 [1] through the exit gate [7] that has been opened by the exit gate solenoid (SD304). The paper exit roller /2 [1] exits the originals to the original exit tray (for small size) [2] with their copied side down. II Composition/Operation
df603to2029c
[5]
[6]
[1]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] Paper exit roller /2
[3]
[7]
[4] [5] [6] [7] Flapper
[2]
Exits the originals to the original exit tray (for small size) Conveyance to the reversal section
Reverse roller Reverse conveyance roller Exit gate
2 -19
PAPER EXIT SECTION (2) Double sided original
The originals the rear face of which has been scanned are conveyed to the exit gate [5] in the same manner as with the single sided originals. At this time, the gate [5] is closed by the exit gate solenoid (SD304), and the originals are conveyed to the paper exit reversal section [2] through the paper exit reverse roller [3]. When the original reverse/exit sensor (PS313) [4] of the paper exit reversal section detects the originals, the paper exit reverse roller [3] stops. When SD304 opens the exit gate [5], the paper exit reverse roller [3] starts to make a high speed reverse rotation to send back the conveyed originals. At this time, the exit gate [5] is open and the originals are exited to the original exit tray (for small size) [1] with their front face down. II Composition/Operation
[5]
[6]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] Exits the originals to the original exit tray (for small size) Conveyance to the paper exit reversal section Paper exit reverse roller [4] [5] [6]
[2]
df603to2030c
Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313) Exit gate Paper exit roller /2
2 -20
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 B. Paper exit operation of large size original (1) Single sided original
PAPER EXIT SECTION
The originals that have been scanned are conveyed to the paper exit roller /1 [2] by the conveyance roller [4] because of the flapper [3] and the paper exit gate [5] being opened by the gate solenoid (SD303). And then, the paper exit roller /1 [2] makes a low speed normal rotation to exit the originals to the original exit tray (for large size) [1] with their copied face down.
[5]
[1]
[4]
[1] [2]
[3]
[2]
[3] [4] Flapper Conveyance roller
df603to2031c
Exits the originals to the original exit tray (for large size) Paper exit roller /1
(2) Double sided original The originals the rear face of which has been scanned are conveyed to the reversal section [2] because of the flapper [4] being closed by the gate solenoid (SD303). When the original reverse sensor (PS309) [3] detects the trailing edge of the originals conveyed, SD303 opens the flapper [4] and the paper exit gate. The originals are exited to the original exit tray (for large size) [1] by the paper exit roller /1 [6] through the flapper that is open.
[5]
[6]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[1] [2]
[2]
[3] [4] [5] [6] Original reverse sensor (PS309) Flapper Paper exit gate Paper exit roller /1
df603to2032c
Exits the originals to the original exit tray (for large size) Conveyance to the reversal section
2 -21
PAPER EXIT SECTION
Blank page
2 -22
pf701ma.book Page 1 Wednesday, March 2, 2005 1:30 PM
SERVICE MANUAL
Theory of Operation
PF-701
2005.03 Ver. 2.0
pf701ma.book Page i Wednesday, March 2, 2005 1:30 PM
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
OUTLINE
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
II
1.1 1.2 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6 1.3.7 1.3.8 2.1 2.2 2.3 Tray lift drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Paper feed drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Pick-up drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Size detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Pick-up mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Separation mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Air assist mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Paper empty detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Remaining paper detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Tray lock control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
1. PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 2.3.1 2.3.2 3.1 4.1 Pre-registration control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
3. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Dehumidification heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Parts for overlay printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 4. PCS CORRESPONDING PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
pf701ma.book Page ii Wednesday, March 2, 2005 1:30 PM
CONTENTS
I Outline
Blank page
ii
I OUTLINE
1.1
Type: I Outline
Type
Large capacity paper feed unit Front loading type 3-tray paper feeder
Name:
1.2
Functions
3 trays (All trays universal) 6,000 sheets (80 g/m2 standard paper) = 2,000 sheets x 3 trays
Number of trays: Maximum tray capacity:
1.3
Type of paper
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm) PPC paper, high quality paper, coated paper, label paper, trace paper 50 g/m2 to 244 g/m2 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
Paper size: Applicable paper: Paper weight: Tray /3, /5: Tray /4:
1.4
Maintenance
1.5
Machine data
24V/5V DC, 14.5V AC (supplied both from the main body) 807 mm (W) x 1020 mm (H) x 675 mm (D) 142 kg
Power source: Dimensions: Weight:
Maximum power consumption: 100W or less
1.6
1 -1
UNIT COMPOSITION
2. UNIT COMPOSITION
I Outline
[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
pf701to1001c
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Tray section Tray /3 Tray /4 Tray /5
[5] [6] [7]
Exit conveyance Vertical conveyance Conveyance section
1 -2
PAPER PATH
3. PAPER PATH
[1]
I Outline
[2] [4]
[3]
pf701to1002c
[1] [2]
Paper path of the tray /3 Paper path of the tray /4
[3] [4]
Paper path of the tray /5 Paper path to the main body (trays /3, /4 and /5)
1 -3
PAPER PATH
I Outline
Blank page
1 -4
PAPER FEED SECTION
1.1 Composition
[6]
[5]
[7]
[1]
[4]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[3]
Item
[2]
Specification/mechanism Dead weight pressure roller + solenoid
pf701to2001c
Paper pick-up method Paper separation method /1 Paper size detection method Paper separation method /2 Paper separation method /3 Paper empty detection method Paper lift method
Forced reverse rotation by means of separation roller + electromagnetic clutch (for tray /4 only) Main scan direction: Volume resistance Sub scan direction: Photo sensor Torque limiter + separation roller + electromagnetic clutch Air assist fan Photo sensor Wire drive method horizontal up/down
2 -1
PAPER FEED SECTION
1.2
1.2.1
Drive
Tray lift drive
[2]
[6]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
pf701to2002c
[1] [2] [3]
Lift wires /Fr2 and /Rr2 Lift wires /Fr1 and /Rr1 Paper lift plate
[4] [5] [6]
Paper lift motors /1 (M42), /2 (M43) and /3 (M44) Lift release coupling gear Torque limiting gear (oil damper)
2 -2
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 1.2.2 Paper feed drive
PAPER FEED SECTION
[12] [11]
[1] [2]
M40
[3] [4]
[5] [10]
[9]
[8]
[6] [7]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Tray rear section Tray center section Paper feed roller Belt Pick-up roller Separation roller [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] Tray /4 only Torque limiter Forced separation clutch (CL11) Separation clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL10) and /3 (CL13) Coupling Paper feed clutches /1 (CL6), /2 (CL9) and /3 (CL12)
pf701to2003c
2 -3
PAPER FEED SECTION 1.2.3 Pick-up drive
[2]
[1]
pf701to2004c
[1]
Pick-up solenoids /1 (SD14), /2 (SD15) and /3 (SD16)
[2]
Pick-up roller
2 -4
PAPER FEED SECTION
1.3
1.3.1
Operation
Up/down control
A. Up operation The paper lift motors /1 (M42), /2 (M43) and /3 (M44) wind up the lift wires through the pulleys to lift up the paper lift plate. B. Down operation When pulling out the tray, the coupling gear [2] that transmits the drive force from the motor shaft [3] to the pulley [1] is detached by the release lever [4]. The paper lift plate goes down slowly by its own weight through the torque restriction gear [5] that is activated only while in the down operation. II Composition/Operation
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] Pulley Coupling gear Motor shaft [4] [5]
[4]
Release lever Torque limiting gear
[3]
pf701to2005c
C. Operation timing When the tray is set, the paper lift motors /1 (M42), /2 (M43) and /3 (M44) turn on to bring up the paper lift plate. When the upper limit sensor /1 (PS71), /2 (PS77) and /3 (PS83) turn on, the motors M42, M43 and M44 stop. When the sensors PS71, PS77 and PS83 turn off from on while in printing, the motors M42, M43 and M44 turn on again to bring up the paper lift plate until the sensors PS71, PS77 and PS83 turn on, and the motors M42, M43 and M44 turn off.
2 -5
PAPER FEED SECTION 1.3.2 Size detection control
The paper size detection is made in the following two directions: a detection in the main scan direction and the sub scan direction. The size detection in the sub scan direction is made by the following each pair of the sensors: the paper size sensors /Fr1 (PS75) [4] and /Rr1 (PS76) [5] for tray /3, /Fr2 (PS81) [4] and /Rr 2 (PS82) [5] for tray /4, and /Fr3 (PS87) [4] and /Rr3 (PS88) [5] for tray /5. When the paper rear guide [6] is moved, the detection cams /Up [1] and /Lw [2] that are different in their form are pressed by the knob [5]. According to the position of the paper rear guide, the paper size sensors /Fr1 [4], /Fr2 [4] and /Fr3 [4] and Rr1 [3], /Rr2 [3] and /Rr3 [3] turn on and off. II Composition/Operation
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1] [2] [3] Detection cam /Up Detection cam /Lw Paper size sensors /Rr1 (PS76), /Rr2 (PS82) and /Rr3 (PS88) [5] [6] [4]
[1]
pf701to2006c
Paper size sensors /Fr1 (PS75), /Fr2 (PS81) and /Fr3 (PS87) Knob Paper rear guide
2 -6
PAPER FEED SECTION
Paper size
Paper size sensor /Fr1 (PS75), /Fr2 (PS81), /Fr3 (PS87) /Rr1 (PS76), /Rr2 (PS82), /Rr3 (PS88) OFF ON ON II Composition/Operation OFF
A5, B5, A4, 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5 x 11* B5R, A4R, 8.5 x 11R* 12 x 18, F4* B4, A3, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17 *
OFF OFF ON ON
For the paper sizes shown below, it is necessary to set the paper size on the operation panel. Make a selection from among A5 and 5.5 x 8.5. Make a selection from among A4R and 8.5 x 11R. Make a selection as F4 from among 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13 and 8.5 x 13.
The size in the main scan direction is detected by the paper size VR/1 (VR11), /2 (VR13) and /3 (VR15) that are interlocked with the paper guide. The main body is informed of the detection a specified period of time after the tray is set. For the resistance value, a default value is set through the "tray adjustment" in the service mode. 1.3.3 Pick-up mechanism
Paper is picked up when the pick-up solenoids /1 (SD14), /2 (SD15) and /3 (SD16) turn off. When the solenoids SD14, SD15 and SD16 turn off, the pick-up roller goes down to press paper by its own weight. When the paper feed clutches /1 (CL6), /2 (CL9) and /3 (CL12) turn on, the pick-up roller rotates to convey paper to the paper feed roller.
[3]
Paper feed sensor /1 (PS72), /2 (PS78), /3 (PS84) Paper feed motor (M40) Paper feed clutch /1 (CL6), /2 (CL9), /3 (CL12) Pick-up solenoid /1 (SD14), /2 (SD15), /3 (SD16)
[5]
[1]
[1] [2] [3] Start button ON Pick-up of the 1st sheet of paper
[2]
[4] [5]
[4]
pf701to2007c
Pick-up of the 2nd sheet of paper Conveyance of the 2nd sheet of paper
Conveyance of the 1st sheet of paper
2 -7
PAPER FEED SECTION 1.3.4 Separation mechanism
The transmission of the driving force to the separation roller [4] transmits the driving force of the paper feed motor (M40) through the torque limiter [7] by turning on and off the separation clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL10) and / 3 (CL 13) [8]. The separation roller [4] is driven in the direction opposite to the paper conveyance. However, when no paper is conveyed and only one sheet of paper is conveyed, the frictional force generating between the paper feed roller [1] and the separation roller [4] or the paper and the separation roller is greater than the frictional force of the torque limiter [3]. Accordingly, the separation roller rotates in the direction of the paper conveyance to convey paper to the vertical conveyance section. II Composition/Operation When 2 or more sheets of paper are conveyed, the frictional force between these sheets of paper is smaller than the frictional force of the torque limiter and the separation roller rotates in the reverse direction to prevent the lower most paper from being conveyed. Tray /4 is provided with the forced separation clutch (CL11) [5] that forcibly rotates the separation roller [4] in the reverse direction not through the torque limiter [7].
[9] [1] [2]
[8] [7] [3]
[6] [5]
[4]
[4] [8]
[5]
[6]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Pick-up roller 1st sheet of paper 2nd sheet of paper Separation roller Forced separation clutch (CL11) [9] [6] [7] [8]
[7]
Tray /4 only Torque limiter
pf701to2008c
Separation clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL10) and /3 (CL13) Paper feed roller
2 -8
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 A. Separation clutch control
PAPER FEED SECTION
When paper is slippery (or, when the power of conveyance is not sufficient), paper conveyed from the pick-up roller may be unable to pass through the separation sections of the paper feed roller and the separation roller. To alleviate a condition like this, the separation clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL10) and /3 (CL13) are not turned ON until paper gets to the separation section to remove the drive force to the separation roller, and allow it to function as a driven roller to the paper feed roller. After paper gets to the separation section, turn ON the CL7, CL10 and CL13 to conduct the normal separation operation. However, this control should be conducted as shown below. Type of paper: Coated paper B: Conducted unconditionally. conveyance at the separation section. B. Forced separation clutch control (tray /4 only) The forced separation clutch (CL11) is equipped only to the tray /4. When paper is conveyed to the separation roller, it rotates the separation roller momentarily in the reverse direction independent of the torque limiter for greater separation of paper. This control is automatically made only in the high temperature condition for coated paper A and B weighing more than 72 g/m2. However, the DIPSW26-4 can be used to select a high temperature as a condition for control. II Composition/Operation Type of paper: Those other than the coated paper B:Conducted automatically judging from the condition of
2 -9
PAPER FEED SECTION 1.3.5 Air assist mechanism
Trays /3 to /5 are provided with paper feed assist fans that blow air [4] onto paper [3] from a pair of paper guides attached both in front and in the rear and assist the separation of paper. Tray /3 is provided with paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM41) [2] and /Rr1 (FM42) [1], tray /4 with paper feed assist fans /Fr2 (FM43) [2] and /Rr2 (FM44) [1], and tray /5 with paper feed assist fans /Fr3 (FM45) [2] and /Rr3 (FM46) [1]. Each of the paper feed assist fans is effective especially for thick paper, and paper with a high degree of adhesion (such as coated paper). However, fan assist using plain paper may result in improper paper feed.
[3]
[4]
[2] [1]
pf701to2010c
[1] [2]
Paper feed assist fans /Rr1 (FM42), /Rr2 (FM44), /Rr3 (FM46) Paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM41), /Fr2 (FM43), /Fr3 (FM45)
[3] [4]
Paper Blowout of air
A. Operation timing The operation of the paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM41), /Rr1 (FM42), /Fr2 (FM43), /Rr2 (FM44), /Fr3 (FM45) and /Rr3 (FM46) can be selected through the user setting on the operation panel from among the following three modes: Always ON, always OFF and Auto. While in the Auto mode, the paper feed assist fans is normally turned OFF. However, when the conveyance time from the start of the paper feed to the paper feed sensors /1 (PS72), /2 (PS783) and /3 (PS84) is in excess of a specified period of time, or when a no feed jam condition occurs, the paper feed assist fan of the corresponding tray is turned ON at that point of time. However, when a paper type other than the coated paper B is set and the separation roller functions as a driven roller to the paper feed roller by the control of the separation clutch, the paper feed assist fan remains OFF to prevent the multi feed of paper. The operations in this Auto mode can be reset by pulling out the tray (except for pulling out of the tray while in a jam), or turning OFF the power switch.
2 -10
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 1.3.6 Paper empty detection control
PAPER FEED SECTION
Paper empty detection in the tray is made by the paper empty sensors /1 (PS73), /2 (PS79) and /3 (PS85). 1.3.7 Remaining paper detection control
Remaining paper detection is made by the remaining paper VR/1 (VR10), /2 (VR12) and /3 (VR14) that are interlocked with the up/down operation of the paper lift plate through the pulley and the gear. The remaining paper quantity is detected in the following 5 stages according to the resistance value, and the main body is informed of the detection. Stage 1 (displayed in red) : Less than 10% II Composition/Operation Stage 1 (displayed in white) : Less than 25% Stage 2 (displayed in white) : 25% to 50% Stage 3 (displayed in white) : 50% to 75% Stage 4 (displayed in white) : 75% to 100%
[2]
[1]
pf701to2011c
[1]
Remaining paper VR/1 (VR10), /2 (VR12), /3 (VR14)
[2]
Lift pulley /Rr
1.3.8
Tray lock control
Each of the trays is locked by the tray lock lever. When it is found that either of the handle release sensors /1 (PS74), /2 (PS80) and /3 (PS86) of the trays /3 to /5 turns off, the tray lock solenoids /1 (SD10), /2 (SD11) and /3 (SD12) of the corresponding tray turns on to bring up the tray lock lever and release the lock, thus allowing the tray to be pulled out. When it is found that any other sensor turns off while either of the sensors PS74, PS80 and PS86 turns off, none of the solenoids SD10, SD11 and SD12 other than the one that has already turned on turns on to prevent two or more trays from being pulled out at the same time. When a jam occurs that affects the tray and the exit conveyance section, the tray remains locked until the jammed paper is removed. Doing this prevents the paper from being torn off.
2 -11
CONVEYANCE SECTION
2.1 Composition
[1]
pf701to2012c
Symbol [1]
Item Registration method
Specification/mechanism Creation of a roller stopper loop
2 -12
CONVEYANCE SECTION
2.2
Drive
[18] [17] [16] [15] [14]
pf701to2013c
[1]
[13]
[12] [11] [2]
[10] [9] [8] [7] [6] [5] [3]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Coupling (transmission of driving force to the tray /3) Coupling (transmission of driving force to the tray /4) Coupling (transmission of driving force to the tray /5) Paper feed motor (M40) Pre-registration clutch /3 (CL4) Pre-registration roller /5 Conveyance roller /4 Intermediate clutch /Lw (CL5) Conveyance roller /3 [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18]
Pre-registration clutch /2 (CL3) Exit conveyance roller PF exit conveyance motor (M41) Pre-registration roller /4 Conveyance roller /2 Conveyance roller /1 Intermediate clutch /Up (CL2) Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL1) Pre-registration roller /3
2 -13
CONVEYANCE SECTION
2.3
2.3.1
Operation
Pre-registration control
When paper feed starts, paper is sent out to the pre-registration roller by the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller. When paper strikes the pre-registration roller that is stationary, a loop is formed to adjust the skew of paper. When the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL3) and /3 (CL4) turn on, the driving force of the paper feed motor (M40) is transmitted to the pre-registration rollers 3/, /4 and /5 to convey paper in the direction of the main body. II Composition/Operation 2.3.2 Conveyance control
For the vertical conveyance, the driving force of the paper feed motor (M40) is transmitted by turning on and off the intermediate clutches /Up (CL2) and /Lw (CL5), and the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL3) and /3 (CL4). The exit conveyance is made by the PF exit conveyance motor (M41). Paper that is fed from tray /3 is conveyed to the conveyance rollers /1 and /2 driven through the pre-registration roller /3, CL2 that is in turn driven by the CL1, and then conveyed to the exit conveyance roller. When the loop sensor /1 (PS92) detects the trailing edge of paper, the CL2 turns off. Paper that is fed from tray /4 is conveyed to the exit conveyance roller by the pre-registration roller that is in turn driven by the CL3. Paper that is fed from tray /5 is conveyed to the conveyance rollers /4 and /3 through the pre-registration roller / 5, CL5 that is in turn driven by the CL4, and then conveyed to the exit conveyance roller. When the loop sensor /3 (PS98) detects the trailing edge of paper, the CL5 turns off. The exit conveyance roller is driven by the PF exit conveyance motor (M41). It starts to rotate at a low speed when the loop sensors /1 (PS92), 2/ (PS94) and /3 (PS98) detect paper, and turns off when the exit sensor (PS99) detects the trailing edge of paper.
2 -14
OTHERS
3. OTHERS
3.1 Dehumidification heater
Trays /3 to /5 are provided with the dehumidification heaters /1 (HTR1), /2 (HTR2) and /3 (HTR3), 1 each respectively, below each tray. They are turned on when the dehumidification heater switch (SW3) of the main body is turned ON.
[1]
[2]
[3]
pf701to2014c
[1] [2]
Dehumidification heater /1 (HTR1) Dehumidification heater /2 (HTR2)
[3]
Dehumidification heater /3 (HTR3)
2 -15
PCS CORRESPONDING PARTS
4. PCS CORRESPONDING PARTS

4.1 Parts for overlay printing
The following are available as PCS corresponding parts for overlay printing. Cleaning brush Paper feed assist plate For particulars, see chapter II "10.4 PCS corresponding parts" in the Theory of Operation for the main body. II Composition/Operation
2 -16
fd501ma.book Page 1 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:35 PM
SERVICE MANUAL
Theory of Operation
FD-501
2004.10 Ver. 1.0
fd501ma.book Page i Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:35 PM
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
OUTLINE
1.1 1.2 1.3 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 Punching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Folding functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 PI functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
II
1.1 1.2 1.3 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 2.1 2.2 2.3 3.1 3.2 3.3 Conveyance path switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Conveyance line speed control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Alignment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
1. CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. PUNCH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 4.1 4.2 4.3 Registration control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Conveyance path switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 1st folding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 2nd folding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 3rd folding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
3. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
4. MAIN TRAY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 4.3.1 5.1 5.2 Main tray up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
5. SUB TRAY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
fd501ma.book Page ii Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:35 PM
CONTENTS 5.3
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
5.3.1 I Outline 5.3.2 6.1 6.2
Sub tray full detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Line speed switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
6. PI SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 Tray lift drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Paper feed drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Pick-up drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Size detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Pick-up mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Separation mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Multi feed detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Paper empty detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
6.3
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6
ii
I OUTLINE
1.1
Type: I Outline
Type
Punchmulti folding finisher Multi folding device with punch and PI functions
Name:
1.2
Functions
A. Functions Normal paper exit function: Transfer paper exited from the main body is exited into the main tray/sub tray. Punching function: Folding function: Transfer paper that is exited by the main body or fed to the PI is punched for each sheet of paper and exited into the main tray/sub tray. Transfer paper that is exited from the main body or fed to the PI is handled for folding (either one of the following: Z-fold, Letter fold-out, Letter fold-in, Double parallel fold, Gate fold, and folding) for each sheet of paper, and exited into the sub tray/main tray (The Z-fold exit to the main tray while in the FS connection is limited only to B4, A3, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17, 12 x 18 and 8K.) PI insertion function: Manual mode: PI tray paper is inserted in the transfer paper exited from the main body. PI tray paper is punched, folded and stapled, and then exited into the sub tray/ main tray. (The stapling function is available only when the staple unit is connected to the downstream of the FD.) B. Maximum tray capacity Main tray (weighing 50 to 244 g/m2): 2,500 sheets: 1,500 sheets: 1,500 sheets: 500 sheets 200 sheets: A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 16K, 16KR A3, B4, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm) 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 12 x 18, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 8K A5, A5R, B6R, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R, wide paper, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR C. Processing capacity: 105PPM
Sub tray (weighing 50 to 300 g/m2):
1.3
1.3.1
Type of paper
Punching function A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 14, 8K, 16K, 5.5 x 8.5 A3, B4, A4, B5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8K, 16K
A. Paper size: 2 holes: 3 holes/4 holes:
1 -1
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS B. Applicable paper: Plain paper, index paper I Outline C. Paper weight: 50 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 1.3.2 Folding functions
A. Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11R, 8K B. Applicable paper: Plain paper C. Paper weight: 1.3.3 Folding, Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out, Z-fold Double parallel fold, Gate fold: PI functions 50 g/m2 to 130 g/m2 50 g/m2 to 91 g/m2
A. Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, standard index paper, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm), 8K, 16K, 16KR B. Applicable paper: Plain paper, high-quality paper, trace paper, coated paper C. Paper weight: 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 D. Maximum tray capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) x 2 trays
1.4
Maintenance
1.5
Machine data
200 VAC, DCS 5V (5V DCS is supplied from the main body.) W 400 mm x D 656 mm x H 1231 mm (The main tray is not included in the width) 130 kg
Power source (for metric area): 230 VAC, DCS 5V (5V DCS is supplied from the main body.) Power source (for inch area): Dimensions: Weight: Maximum power consumption: 180 VA or less
1.6
1 -2
UNIT COMPOSITION
2. UNIT COMPOSITION
I Outline
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
fd501to1001c
[1] [2] [3]
PI section Conveyance section Punch section
[4] [5] [6]
Folding conveyance section Main tray section Sub tray section
1 -3
PAPER PATH
3. PAPER PATH
I Outline A. Straight mode
[1]
[2]
fd501to1002c
[1]
Paper through from the PI
[2]
Paper through from the main body paper exit
1 -4
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 B. Sub tray mode
PAPER PATH
[1]
[2]
fd501to1003c
[1]
Paper through from the PI
[2]
Paper through from the main body paper exit
1 -5
I Outline
PAPER PATH C. Punch mode (L and S sizes)
I Outline
[1] [6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1004c
[1] [2] [3]
Paper through from the PI Paper through from the main body paper exit In the case of a L size
[4] [5] [6]
In the case of a S size Paper exit to the main tray, paper through to the next option Paper exit to the sub tray
1 -6
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 D. Z-fold mode
PAPER PATH
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1005c
[1] [2] [3]
Paper through from the PI Paper through from the main body paper exit 1st folding
[4] [5] [6]
2nd folding Paper exit to the main tray, paper through to the next option Paper exit to the sub tray
1 -7
I Outline
PAPER PATH E. Letter fold-out mode
I Outline
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1006c
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5] [6]
1 -8
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 F. Letter fold-in/double parallel fold mode
PAPER PATH
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1007c
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5] [6]
1 -9
I Outline
PAPER PATH G. Gate fold mode
I Outline
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6] [5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1008c
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5] [6] [7]
2nd folding 3rd folding Paper exit to the main tray, paper through to the next option Paper exit to the sub tray
1 -10
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 H. Folding mode
PAPER PATH
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1009c
[1] [2] [3]
Paper through from the PI Paper through from the main body paper exit Folding
[4] [5]
Paper exit to the main tray, paper through to the next option Paper exit to the sub tray
1 -11
I Outline
PAPER PATH
I Outline
Blank page
1 -12
CONVEYANCE SECTION
1.1 Composition
[1] [5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
fd501to2001c
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Alignment method
Item Entrance conveyance path switching method Punch conveyance path switching method L size paper conveyance path switching method Paper exit conveyance path switching method
Specification/mechanism Entrance gate + solenoid Alignment plate S size gate + solenoid L size gate + solenoid Sub tray gate + solenoid
2 -1
CONVEYANCE SECTION
1.2
Drive
A. Conveyance drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
fd501to2002c
[1] [2]
Main tray paper exit motor (M17) Intermediate conveyance motor (M3)
[3] [4]
Entrance conveyance motor (M1) Punch conveyance motor (M2)
2 -2
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 B. Gate drive
CONVEYANCE SECTION
[18]
[1] [17] [16]
[2] [15] [3] [4] [14] [5]
[13]
[6] [7]
[12]
[8]
[9] [11] [10]

fd501to2003c
2 -3
CONVEYANCE SECTION
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] II Composition/Operation [8] [9]
Entrance gate Entrance gate solenoid (SD1) Vertical conveyance roller /1 Roller solenoid /1 (SD5) Roller solenoid /2 (SD6) Vertical conveyance roller /2 Vertical conveyance roller /3 Roller solenoid /3 (SD7) Roller solenoid /4 (SD8)
[10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18]
Vertical conveyance roller /4 L size gate solenoid (SD4) L size gate S size gate solenoid (SD3) S size gate Sub tray gate solenoid (SD9) Sub tray gate Sub tray paper exit roller Paper exit solenoid (SD12)
C. Alignment drive
[1]
[2] [4]
[1] [2] Alignment motor (M12) Belt [3] [4]
[3]
Alignment plate /Rr Alignment plate /Fr
fd501to2004c
2 -4
CONVEYANCE SECTION
1.3
1.3.1
Operation
Conveyance path switching
The conveyance path of the paper that has been conveyed to the entrance guide plate varies according to the presence of a punch or folding, the tray into which paper is exited, and the paper size. The switching of the conveyance path is made by the entrance gate, the sub tray gate, the S size gate, the L size gate and the folding gate. (For the folding gate, see "3. Folding conveyance section.") A. Entrance gate Switching is made between the straight conveyance and the punch/folding conveyance by the entrance gate solenoid (SD1). In the case of the straight conveyance, the SD1 remains OFF. When conveying the 1st sheet of paper for punching/folding operation, SD1 is energized a specified period of time after the start button is turned ON. For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper, SD1 is energized in accord with the conveyance direction of the succeeding page after the preceding page passes through the FD entrance sensor (PS1). II Composition/Operation
[3]
[1] [2]
fd501to2005c
[1] [2]
Entrance gate Punch mode or folding mode
[3]
Straight mode
2 -5
CONVEYANCE SECTION B. Sub tray gate
Switching is made between the main tray paper exit and the sub tray paper exit by the sub tray gate solenoid (SD9). In the case of the main tray paper exit, the SD9 remains OFF. When exiting the 1st sheet of paper into the sub tray, switch the SD9 a specified period of time after the start button is turned ON. For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper, SD9 is energized in accord with the paper exit direction of the succeeding page after the preceding page passes through the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13).
[1]
[3]
[2]
fd501to2006c
[1] [2]
Sub tray gate Main tray paper exit
[3]
Sub tray paper exit
2 -6
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 C. S size gate
CONVEYANCE SECTION
Switching is made according to the paper size and the presence of folding. The drive of the gate is made by S size gate solenoid (SD3). In the punch mode with no folding and in the case of the S size paper, SD3 remains OFF. When conducting the folding operation or when feeding the 1st sheet of large size paper, switch SD3 a specified period of time after the start button is turned ON. For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper, switch the SD9 in accord with the paper exit direction of the succeeding page after the preceding page passes through the punch conveyance sensor (PS5). S size paper: The length in the sub scan direction is 216 mm or less. II Composition/Operation
[1] [4]
[2] [3]
fd501to2007c
[1] [2]
S size gate In the case of the folding (regardless of the presence of a punch)
[3] [4]
Punch conveyance sensor (PS5) In the case of the S size paper with a punch only
2 -7
CONVEYANCE SECTION D. L size gate
When folding the paper, the conveyance path is switched back and forth for each paper conveyance to prevent the succeeding paper from coming into contact with the trailing edge of the L size paper that is in folding process. The drive of the gate is made by the L size gate solenoid (SD4). L size paper: The length in the sub scan direction is 216 mm or more.
[1]
[2]
fd501to2008c
[1]
L size gate (SD4-OFF position)
[2]
Punch registration sensor (PS6)
2 -8
CONVEYANCE SECTION
For the control of the L size gate, SD4 stands by at the OFF position (outer path) for the 1st sheet of paper to pass through. The 1st sheet of paper turns ON SD4 a specified period of time after the punch registration sensor (PS6) turns ON, and makes the switch to the inner path. When the 2nd sheet of paper turns ON PS6, SD4 turns OFF after a specified period of time to make the switch to the outer path. The above operations are repeated for each sheet of paper.
L size gate solenoid (SD4) Paper passes through the L size gate Outer path Inner path
Punch registration sensor (PS6)

fd501to2039c
1.3.2
Conveyance line speed control
The conveyance line speed of each conveyance section varies according to the type of paper and paper weight. A. Line speed switching The following list shows each of conveyance sections and the range of the conveyance line speed. Conveyance section Entrance conveyance section Intermediate conveyance section Punch conveyance section Main tray paper exit section Sub tray paper exit section Conveyance line speed 290 to 1000 mm/s 800 to 1000 mm/s 490 to 1000 mm/s 205 to 1000 mm/s 500 mm/s
2 -9
CONVEYANCE SECTION 1.3.3 Alignment control
On paper conveyed to the punching position, an alignment operation is made by the 2 alignment plates to improve the accuracy of the punch hole positioning and the folding. And its home position is detected by the alignment plate home sensor (PS10). When the start button is turned ON, M12 rotates in the forward direction to move the alignment plates /Fr and /Rr to the standby position of the paper size. When the paper is conveyed to the punch position in a specified number of steps after it passes through the FD entrance sensor (PS1), the roller solenoid /1 (SD5), the roller solenoid /2 (SD6), the roller solenoid /3 (SD7) and the roller solenoid /4 (SD8) release the pressure of each roller and M12 conducts the alignment operation. The roller solenoids that release each of the rollers from pressure are modified according to the size and the II Composition/Operation direction of paper aligned. A specified period of time after completion of punching the last paper, M12 rotates in the reverse direction to bring the alignment plate back to the home position.
FD entrance sensor (PS1) Punch conveyance motor (M2) Alignment motor (M12) F R
Roller solenoid (SD5, 6, 7, 8)
[1]
[1] [2] Start button ON Move to the standby position
[2]
[3]
[3] [4] Alignment operation
[4]
fd501to2040c
Move to the home position
2 -10
PUNCH SECTION
2. PUNCH SECTION
2.1 Composition
[1]
[3]
[2]
fd501to2009c
Symbol [1] [2] [3]
Item Paper rear registration method Punching method Punch scraps box Punch rear claw
Specification/mechanism Auto switching mechanism between 2 and 3 holes by normal/reverse rotation Punch scraps capacity: 10,000 punches
2 -11
PUNCH SECTION
2.2
Drive
A. Rear registration drive
[1]
[3]
[2]
fd501to2010c
[1] [2]
Punch registration motor (M13) Paper
[3]
Punch rear claw
2 -12
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 B. Punch drive
PUNCH SECTION
[8]
[9]
[10]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[4]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Eccentric cam Front direction 3-hole punch edge Eccentric cam
fd501to2011c
Rotation when punching 3 holes (as seen from the front) Rotation when punching 2 holes (as seen from the front) Punch motor (M10) 2-hole punch edge One-way gear (2-hole punch)
One-way gear (3-hole punch)
2.3
Operation
A. Punch control Punching is made by holding down the trailing edge of paper with the punch rear claw that is driven by the punch registration motor (M13), while driving the eccentric cam by the punch motor (M10). After alignment operations, the roller solenoids /1 to /4 are turned ON to let paper be placed in the unfixed condition. The paper, however, is held by the curvature of the conveyance section. And then, the punch registration motor (M13) rotates a specified number of steps and the punch rear claw holds the trailing edge of paper to move it to the punching position. After a specified period of time, the punch motor (M10) drives for punching. After completion of punching, M13 returns the punch rear claw to the home position. The position of the home position is detected by the punch registration home sensor (PS11). B. Punch hole switching control The punch hole is switched according to the rotational direction of the punch motor (M10). In the case of 2 holes, M10 rotates counterclockwise to drive the 2-hole punch edge. And in the case of 3 holes, M10 rotates clockwise to drive the 3-hole punch edge. The position of the 2-hole punch edge is detected by the 2-hole punch home sensor (PS8) and the position of the 3-hole punch edge is detected by the 3-hole/4-hole punch home sensor (PS9). C. Punch scraps box control The setting of the punch scraps box is detected by the punch scraps box set sensor (PS12), and the full condition of the punch scraps box is detected by the punch scraps full sensor (PS26).
2 -13
FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION
3. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION

3.1 Composition
[5]
[4]
[3] [1]
[2]
fd501to2012c
Symbol [1] 1st folding method
Item
Specification/mechanism Conveyance/folding by the roller (A switching between conveyance and folding is made by the stepping motor + the cam drive.)
[2] [3] [4]
Registration method Folding conveyance path switching method 2nd folding method
Roller stopper loop type Folding gate + solenoid Conveyance/folding by the roller (A switching between conveyance and folding is made by the cam drive.)
[5]
3rd folding method
Conveyance/folding by the roller (A switching between conveyance and folding is made by the cam drive.)
2 -14
3.2
Drive
A. Conveyance drive
[1]
M6
M5 [4]
[3]
M4
fd501to2013c
[1] [2]
Coupling The pulley operates as an idler due to the bearing
[3] [4]
Folding gate Folding gate solenoid (SD15)
2 -15
[2]
FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION B. Folding drive
[1]
M16
[2] [3]
M15 [4]
[5]
M14 [6]
fd501to2014c
[1] [2] [3]
3rd folding roller /1 mounting board 3rd folding guide 2nd folding roller /1 mounting board
[4] [5] [6]
2nd folding guide 1st folding roller /1 mounting board 1st folding guide
2 -16
3.3
3.3.1
Operation
Registration control
The paper that has passes through the punch registration sensor (PS6) and arrives at the folding conveyance section is pressed against the registration roller to make adjustments for skew. A specified period of time after the PS6 turns ON, the 1st folding motor (M4) resumes the conveyance of paper. When no folding operation is made, no registration control is made. However, no folding is made on the paper that has entered the folding conveyance section from the folding entrance sensor side. The paper is conveyed vertically as is and exited to the main tray or the sub tray. II Composition/Operation
[3]
[1] [2]
fd501to2015c
[1] [2]
Punch registration sensor (PS6) Registration roller
[3]
Folding entrance sensor (PS52)
2 -17
FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION 3.3.2 Conveyance path switching
Switching is made between the 2nd folding conveyance path and the 3rd folding conveyance path by the folding gate solenoid (SD15). In the case of other than the Z-fold, a specified period of time after the 1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51) turns ON, SD15 turns ON to convey the paper to the 2nd folding after the 1st folding. In the case of the Z-fold, SD15 remains OFF and the paper is conveyed to the 3rd folding after the 1st folding.
[3]
[2] [1]
fd501to2016c
[1] [2]
In the case of other than the Z-fold Folding gate
[3]
In the case of the Z-fold
2 -18
Timing chart of the 1st folding roller /1 (Other folding rollers are also controlled in the same manner.)
Punch registration sensor (PS6) Roller solenoid /4 (SD8) [3] 1st folding motor (M4) 1st folding roller /1 Conveyance Folding II Composition/Operation
1st folding release motor (M14) 2nd folding motor (M5)
[1]
[1] [2]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2041c
Change of the 1st folding roller /1 to the folding position Change of the 1st folding roller /1 to the conveyance position
1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51)
2 -19
FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION 3.3.3 1st folding control
A. Conveyance/folding switching control The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 1st folding roller /1. This switching is made when the eccentric cam is driven by the 1st folding release motor (M14). After the 1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51) turns ON, the paper is conveyed by a specified number of steps. While the paper is being conveyed, the 1st folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] rotate in the same direction since these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the idle gear [2]. After conveying the paper by the prescribed number of steps, M14 rotates until it gets to a specified number of steps. This rotates the eccentric cam [5] to allow the idle gear arm [3] to separate the idle gear [2] from the 1st II Composition/Operation folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4]. At the same time, when M14 starts up, the cam provided on the inside of the 1st roller gear /2 [4] rotates to allow the 1st roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] to contact each other closely to get the gears engaged.
[1]
[2] [3] [4]
[5]
fd501to2017c
[1] [2] [3]
1st folding roller gear /1 Idle gear Idle gear arm
[4] [5]
1st folding roller gear /2 Eccentric cam
2 -20
And in parallel with this, when the 1st folding release motor (M14) starts up, the winding-up of the wire that pulls the folding guide [2] to the right side is loosened to allow the folding guide [2] to push out the paper in the clearance between the 1st folding rollers /1 [1] and /2 [3]. As a result, the paper gets caught in the rollers to be folded.
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2018c
[1] [2]
1st folding roller /1 Folding guide
[3]
1st folding roller /2
2 -21
FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION 3.3.4 2nd folding control
A. Conveyance/folding switching control The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 2nd folding roller /1. This switching is made when the eccentric cam is driven by the 2nd folding release motor (M15). After the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) turns ON, the paper is conveyed by a specified number of steps. While the paper is being conveyed, the 2nd folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] rotate in the same direction since these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the idle gear [2]. After conveying the paper by the prescribed number of steps, M15 rotates until it gets to a specified number of steps. This rotates the eccentric cam [5] to allow the idle gear arm [3] to separate the idle gear [2] from the 2nd II Composition/Operation folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4]. At the same time, when M14 starts up, the cam provided on the inside of the 2nd roller gear /2 [4] rotates to allow the 1st roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] to contact each other closely to get the gears engaged.
[1]
[2] [3] [4]
[5]
fd501to2019c
[1] [2] [3]
2nd folding roller gear /1 Idle gear Idle gear arm
[4] [5]
2nd folding roller gear /2 Eccentric cam
2 -22
And in parallel with this, when the 2nd folding release motor (M15) starts up, the winding-up of the wire that pulls the folding guide [2] to the right side is loosened to allow the folding guide [2] to push out the paper in the clearance between the 2nd folding rollers /1 [1] and /2 [3]. As a result, the paper gets caught in the rollers to be folded.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2020c
[1] [2]
2nd folding roller /1 Folding guide
[3] [4]
2nd folding roller /2 Direction of paper exit
2 -23
FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION B. Gate fold assist control
In the case of the Gate fold, the 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) turns ON a specified period of time after the 1st folding motor (M14) starts folding. When SD18 starts up, the 2nd roller is pressed firmly. This is a measure taken to avoid a multiple fold that is apt to occur at the folding section of paper when the 2nd folding is made.
fd501to2021c
2 -24
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 3.3.5 3rd folding control
A. Conveyance/folding switching control The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 3rd folding roller /1. This switching is made when the eccentric cam is driven by the 3rd folding release motor (M16). After the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) turns ON, the paper is conveyed by a specified number of steps. While the paper is being conveyed, the 3rd folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] rotate in the same direction since these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the idle gear [2]. After conveying the paper by the prescribed number of steps, M16 rotates until it gets to a specified number of steps. This rotates the eccentric cam [5] to allow the idle gear arm [3] to separate the idle gear [2] from the 3rd folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4]. At the same time, when M16 starts up, the cam provided on the inside of the 3rd roller gear /2 [4] rotates to allow the 3rd roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] to contact each other closely to get the gears engaged. Since the 3rd folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] are connected directly, the gears rotate in the opposite direction. II Composition/Operation
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
fd501to2022c
[1] [2] [3]
3rd folding roller gear /1 Idle gear Idle gear arm
[4] [5]
3rd folding roller gear /2 Eccentric cam
2 -25
And in parallel with this, when the 3rd folding release motor (M16) starts up, the winding-up of the wire that pulls the folding guide [2] to the left side is loosened to allow the folding guide [2] to push out the paper in the clearance between the 3rd folding rollers /1 [1] and /2 [3]. As a result, the paper gets caught in the rollers to be folded.
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
fd501to2023
[1] [2]
3rd folding roller /1 Folding guide
[3] [4]
3rd folding roller /2 Direction of paper exit
2 -26
MAIN TRAY SECTION
4. MAIN TRAY SECTION

4.1 Composition
[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
[5]
fd501to2035c
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Main tray up/down
Item Main tray paper full detection Main tray upper limit detection Tray up/down detection while stacking folded paper Main tray lower limit detection
Specification/mechanism Wire drive Photo sensor Photo sensor Photo sensor Photo sensor
2 -27
MAIN TRAY SECTION
4.2
Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2036c
[1] [2]
Main tray Up/down wire
[3]
Tray up/down motor (M11)
2 -28
MAIN TRAY SECTION
4.3
4.3.1
Operation
Main tray up/down control
The up/down operation of the main tray is controlled by rotating the tray up/down motor (M11) in the normal or reverse direction. A. Main tray paper detection A specified period of time after the main tray paper exit sensor (PS18) turns ON, M11 starts up to bring down the main tray until the main tray upper limit sensor (PS20) turns OFF, and then bring it up again until PS20 turns ON. After the paper is exited, PS20 maintains the distance between the upper surface of the paper exited in the main tray (the surface of the main tray when no paper exited) and the paper exit opening at a fixed distance to prevent the paper exited from having an uneven edge. B. Switching the operation of the main tray The main tray is set so that it normally does not operate. When letting the main tray operate, insert the short connector [2] into the CN90 [1]. II Composition/Operation
Caution: Letting the main tray operate with the next option connected may cause damages to the machine. Be absolutely sure not to connect the short connector.
[2] [1]
fd501to2037c
2 -29
SUB TRAY SECTION
5. SUB TRAY SECTION

5.1 Composition
[1]
fd501to2024c
Symbol [1]
Item Paper full detection method
Specification/mechanism Photosensor + actuator
2 -30
SUB TRAY SECTION
5.2
Drive
[1] [3]
M3
[2]
fd501to2025c
[1] [2]
Paper exit solenoid (SD12) Sub tray paper exit roller
[3]
Sub tray paper exit roller
2 -31
SUB TRAY SECTION
5.3
5.3.1
Operation
Sub tray full detection control
When the paper that has been exited in the sub tray gets to a specified thickness, the sub tray paper full sensor (PS17) [2] turns OFF, and the "sub tray paper full" information is sent to the main body. Upon receipt of this information, the main body displays the message on the operation LCD. When the folded paper on the sub tray is unfolded and the sub tray paper full sensor (PS46) [1] turns ON, the "sub tray paper full" information is also sent to the main body. II Composition/Operation
[1]
[2]
fd501to2026c
[1]
Sub tray folding paper full sensor (PS46)
[2]
Sub tray paper full sensor (PS17)
5.3.2
Line speed switching
Paper conveyed by the intermediate conveyance motor (M3) is decelerated for each sheet of paper to be exited into the sub tray.
FD entrance sensor (PS1) Sub tray paper exit sensor (PS10) Intermediate conveyance motor (M3) [2] Deceleration
[1]
[1] * Deceleration of the intermediate conveyance motor (M3) [2] High speed rotation
fd501to2042c
The time period up to the deceleration can be changed by the system speed on the main body side.
2 -32
PI SECTION
6. PI SECTION
6.1 Composition
[1]
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[8]
[7]
fd501to2027c
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
Item Paper pick-up method Manual operation Paper separation method Paper set detection method Paper size/main scan direction detection method Paper size/sub scan direction detection method Paper lift method Multi feed detection method
Specification/mechanism Dead weight pressure roller + solenoid + one-way clutch Button + LED light-up indication (available for the tray /Up only) Torque limiter + separation roller + electromagnetic clutch Photo sensor Paper regulation plate interlocked volume resistance Reflective photo sensor (3 pc.) Gear driven rotational up/down Ultrasonic sensor
2 -33
PI SECTION
6.2
6.2.1
Drive
Tray lift drive
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2028c
[1] [2]
Paper lift motor /Up (M8) Paper lift motor /Lw (M9)
[3] [4]
PI lift plate /Lw PI lift plate /Up
2 -34
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 6.2.2 Paper feed drive
PI SECTION
[10]
[11] [1]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6] [5]
[4] [3]
fd501to2029c
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Separation roller /Up PI registration clutch /Up (CL1) PI registration clutch /Lw (CL2) Separation roller /Lw Rotational direction of separation roller /Lw Paper feed roller /Lw
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
Pick-up roller /Lw PI conveyance motor (M7) Rotational direction of separation roller /Up Pick-up roller /Up Paper feed roller /Up
2 -35
PI SECTION 6.2.3 Pick-up drive
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
[1] [2] [3] Spring Direction of spring force Release arm [5] [4]
fd501to2030c
PI pick-up solenoids /Up (SD13) and /Lw (SD14) Pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw
2 -36
PI SECTION
6.3
6.3.1
Operation
Size detection control
For the size detection of a paper, there are the following two directions for each of the tray /Up and the tray /Lw: that is, the main scan direction and the sub scan direction. The size detection in the sub scan, when the PI paper set sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw (PS45) [6] turn ON, is made by the following 3 sensors: PI maximum size sensors /Up (PS47) and /Lw (PS48) [1], L size sensors /Up (PS35) and /Lw (PS41) [2] and S size sensors /Up (PS36) and /Lw (PS42) [3]. When the PS44 and PS45 are OFF, the tray is judged "paper empty." The size detection in the main scan is made by the paper size VR /Up (VR31) and /Lw (VR32) [4] that are interlocked with the paper regulation plate [5]. II Composition/Operation
[1] [2]
[3] [6] [4]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] PI maximum size sensors /Up (PS47) and / Lw (PS48) L size sensors /Up (PS35) and /Lw (PS41) S size sensors /Up (PS36) and /Lw (PS42) [4] [5] [6]
fd501to2031c
Paper size VR /Up (VR31) and /Lw (VR32) Paper regulation plate PI paper set sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw (PS45)
2 -37
PI SECTION 6.3.2 Up/down control
For the up/down of the tray, when the paper lift motors /Up (M8) [1] and /Lw (M9) [7] rotate in the normal and reverse directions, the lift arms /Up [11] and /Lw [9] start up to bring up and down the PI lift plates /Up [12] and /Lw [10]. The lower limit position is detected by the PI lift plate home sensors /Up (PS34) [2] and /Lw (PS40) [8]. The upper limit position is detected by the PI upper limit sensors /Up (PS32) [4] and /Lw (PS38) [6] at the position to which the actuators /Up [3] and /Lw [5] are pushed up by the PI lift plate. When the PI paper set sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw (PS45) are ON with the main body start button ON, M8 and M9 turn ON to bring up the PI lift plate. When PS32 and PS38 turn ON, M8 and M9 stop. While in the copy/print operation, when PS32 and PS38 turn OFF from ON, M8 and M9 turn ON again to bring II Composition/Operation up the plate until PS32 and PS38 turn ON. When PS44 and PS45 turn OFF with no paper left, M8 and M9 make a reverse rotation to move down the PI lift plate until PS34 and PS40 turn ON.
[12]
[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
[11]
[10] [6] [9]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Paper lift motor /Up (M8) PI lift plate home sensor /Up (PS34) Actuator /Up PI upper limit sensor /Up (PS32) Actuator /Lw PI upper limit sensor /Lw (PS38)
[5]
[8]
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
[7]
Paper lift motor /Lw (M9)
fd501to2032c
PI lift plate home sensor /Lw (PS40) Lift arm /Lw PI lift plate /Lw Lift arm /Up PI lift plate /Up
2 -38
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 6.3.3 Pick-up mechanism
PI SECTION
The picking-up of the paper [6] is made when the PI pick-up solenoids /Up (SD13) and /Lw (SD14) [5] turn ON. The release arm that is pressed down by the spring [1] in the direction of [2] presses down the paper feed arm [4] to place the pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw [7] in the release condition. When SD13 and SD14 [5] turn ON, the release arm is released upward and the pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw [7] go down by their own weight. The pickup roller that is rotated by the PI conveyance motor (M7) presses down the paper to pick it up.
[6]
[7]
[1]
fd501to2033c
[2] [3] [4] [5]

[1] [2] [3] [4] Spring Direction of the spring force Release arm Paper feed arm [6] [7] [5]
PI pick-up solenoids /Up (SD13) and /Lw (SD14) Paper Pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw
2 -39
PI SECTION 6.3.4 Separation mechanism
The separation roller [4] is driven in the direction opposite to the paper conveyance [2]. However, when no paper is conveyed or only one sheet of paper is conveyed, the frictional force generating between the paper feed roller [1] and the separation roller [4] or the paper and the separation roller is greater than the frictional force of the torque limiter [3]. Accordingly, the separation roller [4] rotates in the direction of the paper conveyance [2] to convey paper to the vertical conveyance section. When 2 or more sheets of paper are conveyed, the frictional force between these sheets of paper is smaller than the frictional force of the torque limiter [3] and the separation roller [4] rotates in the reverse direction to prevent the lower most paper from being conveyed. II Composition/Operation When the PI registration clutches /Up (CL1) and /Lw (CL2) turn ON according to the PI paper feed demand signal, the paper feed roller [1], the separation roller [4], and the pick-up roller [7] rotate to convey the paper one at a time.
[7] [6]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to2034c
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Paper feed rollers /Up and /Lw Conveyance direction of a sheet of paper Torque limiter Separation rollers /Up and /Lw
[5] [6] [7]
2nd sheet of paper 1st sheet of paper Pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw
2 -40
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 6.3.5 Multi feed detection control
PI SECTION
To detect a multi feed while in the PI paper feed, the PI conveyance path is provided with the multi feed sensor. The multi feed sensor is a ultrasonic sensor made up of a pair of a sender and a receiver. This sensor receives ultrasonic waves sent from the multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB1) [1] by the multi feed detection board /2 (MFDB2) [2]. Based on the difference in the amount of ultrasonic waves received when a single sheet of paper [1] and the plural sheets of paper [4] pass through between the sender and the receiver, a check is made to see if paper has been multi fed or not. The multi feed detection function turns ON (operates) when the LED on the lower side is turned on by the multi feed detection function selection button on the FD operation board (FDOB) and when no selection is made. And it turns OFF (does not operate) when the LED on the upper side is turned on. II Composition/Operation
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1] [2]
[1]
[5]
[3] One sheet of paper [4] More than one sheet of paper [5] Layer of air
fd501to2038c
Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB1) Multi feed detection board /2 (MFDB2)
6.3.6
Paper empty detection control
The detection of the presence of paper in the tray section while in the print stop is made by the PI empty sensors /Up (PS33) and /Lw (PS39). And also, the paper empty detection while in the print is made by the PI set sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw (PS45) to stop the paper feed from the trays /1 to /5 when PS44 and PS45 detect the trailing edge of the last paper.
2 -41
PI SECTION
Blank page
2 -42
ls502ma.book Page 1 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:36 PM
SERVICE MANUAL
Theory of Operation
LS-501/LS-502
2004.10 Ver. 1.0
ls502ma.book Page i Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:36 PM
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
OUTLINE
II
1.1 1.2 1.3 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 1.3.1 1.3.2 2.1 2.2 2.3 Door open/close mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Jam release lever lock mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
1. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 3.1 3.2 Path switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Conveyance line speed control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Paper cooling mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 Stacker tray/sub tray conveyance drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Coupling conveyance/grip belt/paper press arm drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Stacker tray up down drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Shift unit/alignment plate drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Rear stopper/job partition plate drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Front stopper/paper press arm drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Stacker tray conveyance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Coupling conveyance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Sub tray conveyance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
ls502ma.book Page ii Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:36 PM
CONTENTS
I Outline
Blank page
ii
I OUTLINE
1.1
Type: I Outline Roller conveyance method Grip conveyance method Roller conveyance method Roller conveyance (LS-501 only) Movable alignment lever (stacker tray only) Horizontal stacking Conveyance direction shift Mixing of original sizes not allowed (stacker tray only) Shift amount: 20 mm (stacker tray only) A3, B4, A4, A4R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm) When 2,000 sheets loaded Sub tray: B5, A5 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, index paper, wide size paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm) Paper weight Stacker tray: Sub tray: 50 g/m2 to 244 g/m2 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
Type
Large capacity stacker Grip conveyance type horizontal stacker
Name:
Conveyance method: Entrance conveyance Stacker tray conveyance Sub tray conveyance Coupling conveyance Alignment method: Method of stacking: Shifting method: Paper exit:
Exited by the hand cart (stacker tray only)
1.2
Mode
Functions
Stacker tray non-sort mode: Sub tray mode: Stacker tray sort mode: Coupling mode: Exited into the stacker tray with no processing made. Exited into the sub tray with no processing made. Exited into the stacker tray after being shifted. Exited into the post-processing unit with no processing made (LS501 only).
Maximum number of sheets loadable Stacker tray: Sub tray: 5,000 sheets (standard paper) 200 sheets (standard paper)
1.3
Type of paper
Stacker tray: When 5,000 sheets loaded
Paper size
1 -1
1.4
I Outline
Maintenance
1.5
Machine data
LS-501 LS-502 24V DC (built-in power source) 24V DC (supplied from the main body) 143W or less 785 mm (W) x 723 mm (D) x 1,020 mm (H) Approx. 110 kg
Power source:
Maximum power consumption: Dimensions: Weight:
1.6
10C to 30C 10% RH to 80% RH
1 -2
UNIT COMPOSITION
2. UNIT COMPOSITION
I Outline
[8]
[9]
[10]
[1]
[7] [2] [3]
[4] [6]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Shift unit 1st gate Entrance conveyance section Stacker tray Hand cart [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Stacker tray conveyance section Coupling conveyance section Sub tray Sub tray conveyance section 2nd gate
ls502to1001c
1 -3
PAPER PATH
3. PAPER PATH
I Outline
[3]
[2]
[1]
ls502to1002c
[1] [2]
Stacker tray non-sort/sort mode Coupling mode
[3]
Sub tray mode
1 -4
COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION
1. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION
1.1 Composition
[3] [1]
[2]
ls502to2001c
Symbol [1] [2] [3]
Item Entrance guide plate lock method Front door lock method Coupling guide plate lock method Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid
1.2
Drive
[4] [1]
[3]
[1] [2] Entrance conveyance lock solenoid (SD5) Entrance jam release lever [3] [4]
[2]
Coupling jam release lever
ls502to2002c
Coupling conveyance lock solenoid (SD11)
2 -1
COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION
1.3
1.3.1
Operation
Door open/close mechanism
While the LS is in operation, the front door is locked by the front door lock solenoid (SD4), thus making it impossible to open and close it. However, while in the coupling conveyance (coupling mode) or while exiting paper into the sub tray (sub tray mode), the front door can be opened and closed. Pressing the paper removing switch on the stacker tray operation board (TOB) brings down the stacker tray. And when the stacker tray arm release sensor (PS15) is turn on, SD4 turns off immediately. The lock is released due to SD4 being turned off and the front door can be opened and closed. II Composition/Operation 1.3.2 Jam release lever lock mechanism
The entrance guide plate and the coupling guide plate are provided with a jam release lever to release jams. The operation of each of the jam release levers is made by the entrance conveyance lock solenoid (SD5) and the coupling conveyance lock solenoid (SD11). ON/OFF timing of SD5 and SD11 Operation timing ON (Lock) OFF While in standing by, when the stacker tray goes down after completion of printing, (Release) and when the front door is open (except in coupling mode and in sub tray mode) When the stacker tray goes up, and while in printing
2 -2
ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION
2. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION

2.1 Composition
[4] [3] [4] [5]
[2]
[1]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Item Paper curl correction method 1st conveyance path switching method 2nd conveyance path switching method Internal cooling method Motor cooling method
ls502to2003c
Specification/mechanism Cooling by fan and duct Solenoid + gate Solenoid + gate Fan Fan
2 -3
2.2
Drive
[1] [2]
[3]
M2
[4]
[8]
[1] [2] [3] [4] 2nd gate solenoid (SD10) Coupling conveyance roller /2 Conveyance motor (M2) 1st gate solenoid (SD1)
[7]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[6]
Entrance roller 1st gate
[5]
ls502to2004c
Coupling conveyance roller /1 2nd gate
2 -4
2.3
2.3.1
Operation
Path switching
The path along which paper conveyed to the entrance guide plate is conveyed varies according to the operation mode. The switching of the conveyance path is made by the 1st gate and the 2nd gate. A. 1st gate The switching of the conveyance path is made between the stacker tray paper exit (stacker tray non-sort mode and stacker tray sort mode) and the sub tray paper exit (sub tray mode) and the coupling conveyance (coupling mode). II Composition/Operation
[1]
[3]
[1] [2] Sub tray mode/coupling mode 1st gate [3]
[2]
ls502to2005c
Stacker tray non-sort mode/stacker tray sort mode
2 -5
ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION B. 2nd gate
The conveyance path is switched between the sub tray paper exit (sub tray mode) and the coupling conveyance (coupling mode).
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1] [2] Coupling mode Sub tray mode [3] 2nd gate
ls502to2006c
2 -6
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 2.3.2 Conveyance line speed control
The conveyance process speed of the entrance roller and the coupling conveyance rollers 1/ and 2/ that are driven by the conveyance motor (M2) varies according to the conveyance process speed of the main body. These operations are common to all the modes. A. When the main body process speed is 1000 mm/s:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Entrance sensor (PS4) Conveyance motor (M2) 1000 mm/s 490 mm/s
ls502to2007c
[1] [2]
Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON 1st sheet of paper
[3] [4]
2nd sheet of paper 3rd sheet of paper
B. When the main body process speed is 490 mm/s:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Entrance sensor (PS4) Conveyance motor (M2) 1000 mm/s 490 mm/s
ls502to2008c
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
2nd sheet of paper 3rd sheet of paper
2 -7
ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION 2.3.3 Paper cooling mechanism
Paper conveyed to the LS is likely to curl up due to fusing heat. Heat storage accumulated in paper stacked during continuous printing may cause tacking (sheets of paper sticking hard each other by toner) when toner that has been fused is re-fused and adheres. So, fresh air is blown on the paper from under the entrance guide plate and above the path guide of the upper surface of the paper stack section, thus cooling down the paper to correct curling and prevent tacking.
[4]
[5]
[3]
[1] [2] Paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5) Paper cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3)
[2]
[1]
[3] [4] [5]
ls502to2028c
Paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1) Paper cooling fan motor /1 (FM2) Paper cooling fan motor /2 (FM6)
2 -8
CONVEYANCE SECTION
3.1 Composition
[15] [16] [6] [7] [1]
[2]
[14] [11] [13] [5] [12] [4] [3]
[8]
[9]
[10]
ls502to2009c
2 -9
CONVEYANCE SECTION
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
Item Paper curl correction method Paper return prevention method Paper rear press auxiliary method Paper rear alignment in shifting method Stacker tray paper empty detection method Paper trailing edge press method Stacker tray conveyance method Paper center press method Paper alignment method Stacker tray conveyance method Coupling conveyance passage detection method Sub tray open/close detection method Paper front stopper in shifting method Paper leading edge press method Stacker tray upper limit detection method Paper front stopper method Photosensor Decurler roller
Specification/mechanism Movable paddler Solenoid + job partition plate Solenoid + rear stopper Photosensor + actuator Solenoid + paper press arm Motor + Grip belt Solenoid + paper press arm Motor + guide plate Hand cart Photosensor + actuator
Stationary type stopper Solenoid + paper press arm Photosensor + press arm Solenoid + stopper
2 -10
CONVEYANCE SECTION
3.2
3.2.1
Drive
Stacker tray/sub tray conveyance drive
[6] [1]
[2]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] Sub tray paper exit motor (M3) Conveyance motor (M2) Decurler roller
[4]
[4] [5] [6] Paddler
[3]
ls502to2010c
Sub tray conveyance roller Sub tray paper exit roller
2 -11
CONVEYANCE SECTION 3.2.2
Coupling conveyance/grip belt/paper press arm drive
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13] [14] [15]
[7]
[6] [5]
is LS-501 only. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Paper press arm /1 Stacker tray paper empty detection actuator Grip belt Grip conveyance motor (M4) Coupling conveyance motor (M6): LS-501 only Coupling paper exit roller: LS-501 only Coupling conveyance roller /7: LS-501 only [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] Coupling conveyance roller /6: LS-501 only Coupling conveyance roller /5: LS-501 only Paper press solenoid /2 (SD7) Coupling conveyance roller /4: LS-501 only Paper press arm /2 Coupling conveyance roller /3 Coupling conveyance motor (M6): LS-502 only Paper press solenoid /1 (SD6)
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
ls502to2011c
2 -12
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 3.2.3 Stacker tray up down drive
CONVEYANCE SECTION
[6]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Wire Spring Wire Belt [5] [6] [7]
ls502to2012c
Stacker tray up down motor (M1) Stacker tray Stacker tray up down arm
2 -13
CONVEYANCE SECTION 3.2.4 Shift unit/alignment plate drive
LS drawing as seen from above. On the right side is the main body.
[5]
[6]
[1]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] Guide rail Alignment plate Alignment motor (M7)
[3]
[4] [5] [6] Shift unit Shift unit motor (M5) Guide rail
[2]
ls502to2013c
2 -14
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 3.2.5 Rear stopper/job partition plate drive
CONVEYANCE SECTION
[1] [4]
[3]
[1] [2] Rear stopper Job partition plate [3] [4]
[2]
Rear stopper solenoid (SD3) Job partition solenoid (SD2)
ls502to2014c
2 -15
CONVEYANCE SECTION 3.2.6 Front stopper/paper press arm drive
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[4]
ls502to2015c
[1] [2] [3]
Spring Paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) Paper press arm /3
[4] [5] [6]
Spring Front stopper Front stopper solenoid (SD9)
2 -16
CONVEYANCE SECTION
3.3
3.3.1
Operation
Stacker tray conveyance
While in the stacker tray non-sort mode and the stacker tray sort mode, paper is conveyed into the stacker tray. A. Decurler Paper that has passed through the 1st gate is conveyed to the grip belt by the decurler roller. At this time, the correction of curled paper is made by the decurler roller. B. Grip conveyance Paper conveyed by the decurler roller enters and is help by the grip provided on the grip belt. The paper held by the grip is conveyed to the section above the stacker tray by the rotation of the grip belt. Two grips are provided on the grip belt and each one of them conveys paper one after the other. The position where the grip is waiting for paper from the decurler roller is controlled by the grip conveyance home sensor (PS5). II Composition/Operation
[5]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Paper Decurler roller Grip Stacker tray [5] [6] [7] Grip Grip belt
[3]
[2]
[1]
ls502to2016c
Grip conveyance home sensor (PS5)
2 -17
CONVEYANCE SECTION C. Front stopper control
Paper conveyed by the grip strikes against the front stopper equipped to the shift unit and is released from the grip. At this time, the shift unit has been moved to the position specified in advance for each paper size. Two types of the front stoppers, more specifically, a movable type and a stationary type, are employed. In stacker tray non-sort mode, only the movable type front stopper is employed. A distance of 20 mm is kept between the position where the movable type front stopper stops and the position in which the stationary type front stopper is, which is the shift distance. For the front stopper solenoid (SD9) that drives the movable type front stopper, a latch-type solenoid is employed that is not required to be energized to maintain the ON state. However, a latch-type solenoid requires II Composition/Operation a different control signal for each ON and OFF action.
[8]
[9]
[10]
[7]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Grip
[2]
[1]
ls502to2017c
Entrance sensor (PS4) Paper Movable type front stopper 20 mm Stationary type front stopper
Stacker tray Grip belt Shift unit Grip
2 -18
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 (1) Stacker tray non-sort mode
CONVEYANCE SECTION
[1]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Entrance sensor (PS4) Shift unit motor (M5) II Composition/Operation Front stopper Latch ON signal solenoid (SD9) Latch OFF signal
[8] [2]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON The shift unit starts to move 1st sheet of paper Movable type front stopper ON
[4]
[5] [6] [7] [8] 2nd sheet of paper 3rd sheet of paper Last sheet of paper Movable type front stopper OFF
ls502to2018c
(2) Stacker tray sort mode
[1]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[8]
Entrance sensor (PS4) Shift unit motor (M5) Front stopper Latch ON signal solenoid (SD9) Latch OFF signal
[10] [2]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON The shift unit starts to move 1st sheet of paper Movable type front stopper ON Last sheet of paper
[4]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[7]
[9]
ls502to2019c
Shift of the 1st sheet of paper Movable type front stopper OFF Shift of the last sheet of paper Movable type front stopper OFF secured Movable type front stopper OFF secured
2 -19
CONVEYANCE SECTION D. Job partition plate
In stacker tray sort mode, the trailing edge of the shift paper is restricted by the job partition plate and the paper is exited onto the stacker tray 20 mm shifted from the non-shift paper. At this time, the upper surface of the nonshift paper does not come to the same level as the lower edge of the job partition plate and the 1st sheet of the shift paper is in possibility of getting into the lower side of the job partition plate. To prevent this, the job partition plate is attached to the upper surface of the non-shift paper that has been exited to restrict the entry of the paper. For the job partition solenoid (SD2) that drives the job partition plate, a latch-type solenoid is employed that is not required to be energized to maintain the ON state. However, a latch-type solenoid requires a different control II Composition/Operation signal for each ON and OFF action.
[5]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] Entrance sensor (PS4) Job partition plate Non-shift paper
[3]
[2]
[4] [5] Stacker tray Shift paper
[1]
ls502to2023c
2 -20
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 (1) Stacker tray non-sort mode Ex.: Letter 4 sheets
CONVEYANCE SECTION
[1]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[8]
Entrance sensor (PS4) Latch ON signal Job partition solenoid (SD2) Latch OFF signal
[9] [3]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON 1st sheet of paper Job partition plate close 2nd sheet of paper Job partition plate close [6] [7] [8] [9]
[5]
[7]
ls502to2021c
3rd sheet of paper Job partition plate close Last sheet of paper Job partition plate close
(2) Stacker tray sort mode Ex.: Letter 2 sheets
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[7]
Entrance sensor (PS4) Latch ON signal Job partition solenoid (SD2) Latch OFF signal
[3]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON 1st sheet of shift paper Job partition plate open (shift amount: 20 mm) 2nd sheet of shift paper [5] [6] [7] [8]
[6]
[8]
ls502to2022c
1st sheet of non-shift paper Job partition plate close 2nd sheet of non-shift paper Job partition plate close
2 -21
CONVEYANCE SECTION E. Rear stopper control
While in the stacker tray sort mode is in shifting, the rear stopper is left open and this plays as a guide for the trailing edge of paper. To assist the separation of paper released from the grip, the paddle is rotated at a high speed. For the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) that drives the rear stopper, a latch-type solenoid is employed that is not required to be energized to maintain the ON state. However, a latch-type solenoid requires a different control signal for each ON and OFF action.
[5]
[1]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] Paddler Entrance sensor (PS4) Rear stopper
[3]
[4] [5]
[2]
ls502to2020c
Paper position while in the stacker tray sort mode Paper position while in the stacker tray non-sort mode
2 -22
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 (1) Stacker tray non-sort mode Ex.: Letter 4 sheets
CONVEYANCE SECTION
[1]
[2]
[5]
[8]
[11]
Entrance sensor (PS4) Latch ON signal Rear stopper solenoid (SD3) Latch OFF signal
[13] [3]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON 1st sheet of paper Rear stopper open Rear stopper close 2nd sheet of paper Rear stopper open Rear stopper close [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]
[4] [6]
[7] [9]
[10] [12]
ls502to2029c
3rd sheet of paper Rear stopper open Rear stopper close 4th sheet of paper Rear stopper open Rear stopper close
(2) Stacker tray sort mode Ex.: Letter 2 sheets
[1]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[9]
Entrance sensor (PS4) Latch ON signal Rear stopper solenoid (SD3) Latch OFF signal
[11] [3]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON Shift of the 1st sheet of paper Rear stopper open Shift of the 2nd sheet of paper Rear stopper close Non-shift of the 1st sheet of paper [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[5] [7]
Rear stopper open Rear stopper close
[8] [10]
ls502to2024c
Non-shift of the 2nd sheet of paper Rear stopper open Rear stopper close
2 -23
CONVEYANCE SECTION F. Paper press arm
The paper that has been released from the grip is pressed one at a time onto the stacker tray by the paper pressure arms /1, /2 and /3 to be loaded on the stacker tray. However, the operation of the paper pressure arm /2 is limited only to the paper size larger than B4.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Entrance sensor (PS4) II Composition/Operation Paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) Paper press solenoid /2 (SD7) Paper press solenoid /3 (SD8)
ls502to2025c
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
2nd sheet of paper Last sheet of paper
G. Alignment plate control Paper loaded on the stacker tray is aligned by the alignment plate for each sheet of paper.
[1]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[9]
Entrance sensor (PS4) Alignment motor (M7) [12]
[10] [11] [2]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON Movement to a position specified for each paper size 1st sheet of paper Alignment of the 1st sheet of paper 2nd sheet of paper Alignment of the 2nd sheet of paper [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
[4]
[6]
[8]
ls502to2026c
3rd sheet of paper Alignment of the 3rd sheet of paper Last sheet of paper Alignment of the last sheet of paper Return to the home position Alignment plate home sensor (PS12)
2 -24
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 H. Stacker tray up down control
CONVEYANCE SECTION
The detection of the upper surface of paper loaded on the stacker tray is made by the paper empty sensor (PS6) through the paper press arm /3. When PS6 is turned off by loading paper that has been exited, the stacker tray up down motor (M1) turns on to lower the stacker tray down to the position at which PS6 turns on. The stacker tray is thus held at a fixed height when paper is being exited. The number of sheets of paper loaded on the stacker tray is detected by the 2000 sheets stacked sensor (PS13) and the 5,000 sheets stacked sensor (PS14) provided on the up down path of the stacker tray and displayed on the operation panel. I. Hand cart detection mechanism II Composition/Operation
The set condition of the hand cart is detected by the hand cart set switch (RS1). And the set condition of the stacker tray is detected by checking to see if the light from the stacker tray set LED (LED1) gets to the stacker tray set sensor (PS1). 3.3.2 Coupling conveyance
In coupling mode, paper is conveyed to the device connected to the subsequent stage of the LS through the coupling conveyance section. A. Line speed switching When paper is conveyed from the main body, the conveyance motor (M2) at the entrance conveyance section is rotated at the same speed as the conveyance speed of the main body. When paper is conveyed to the LS, the speed of rotation of M2 is increased up to 1,000 mm/s to convey paper. 3.3.3 Sub tray conveyance
In sub tray mode, paper is exited into the sub tray. A. Line speed switching
[1]
Entrance sensor (PS4) Sub tray paper exit sensor (PS10) 1000 mm/s Sub tray paper exit motor (M3) 490 mm/s 350 mm/s
[2]
[3]
[4]
ls502to2027c
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
2nd sheet of paper Last sheet of paper
B. Paper full control When the number of the sheets of paper discharged on the sub-tray gets to 200, the sub tray full sensor (PS9) turns on to give indication of "paper full" on the operation panel.
2 -25
CONVEYANCE SECTION
Blank page
2 -26
fs503ma.book Page 1 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:37 PM
SERVICE MANUAL
Theory of Operation
FS-503
2004.10 Ver. 1.0
fs503ma.book Page i Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:37 PM
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
OUTLINE
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1.3.1 Staple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
2. UNIT COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
II
1.1 1.2 1.3 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 1.3.1 2.1 2.2 2.3 3.1 3.2 Conveyance path switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
1. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. SUB TRAY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 4.1 4.2 Stacker entrance roller/paddle drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Stack assist plate/rear stopper drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Intermediate roller/paper exit arm drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Alignment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Stacker conveyance speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Intermediate roller control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Stack assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Rear stopper control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Alignment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Stacker paper exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
3. STACKER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
4. STAPLER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 Stapler movement/rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Stapler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Stapler movement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Staple control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
fs503ma.book Page ii Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:37 PM
CONTENTS
5. MAIN TRAY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 5.1 I Outline 5.2 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 II Composition/Operation Tray up/down drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Main tray paper exit drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Paper exit opening drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Paper exit opening control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Main tray up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
ii
I OUTLINE
1.1
Type: I Outline
Type
Flat-stapling finisher Staple-cut type multi staple device
Name:
Stapling method: Incline clinch (staple cut) method Shifting method: Alignment plate shifting method
1.2
Functions
Straight mode: Shift mode: Sub tray mode: Staple mode: Subset staple mode: Exited into the main tray with no processing made. Exited into the main tray after being shifted. Exited into the sub tray with no processing made. Exited into the main tray after being flat-stapled. Bundles of flat-stapled sheets of paper and single sheets of paper being exited at random into the main tray.
A. Functions
B. Staple Maximum number of sheets to be flat-stapled (Plain paper): 100 sheets: 50 to 91 g/m2 (50 sheets for paper the length of which is 400 mm or longer) 50 sheets: 92 to 130 g/m2 40 sheets: 131 to 161 g/m2 25 sheets: 162 to 244 g/m2 Stapling position: 1 staple at the rear (45), 1 staple at the front, and 2 staples at the center C. Maximum number of sheets loadable Main tray (Weighing 50 to 244 g/m2): Straight/Shift 3,000 sheets 1,500 sheets 500 sheets Staple: 150 copies (2 to 9 sheets stapled) 50 copies (10 to 20 sheets stapled) 30 copies (21 to 30 sheets stapled) 25 copies (31 to 40 sheets stapled) 20 copies (41 to 50 sheets stapled) 15 copies (51 to 60 sheets stapled) 10 copies (61 to 100 sheets stapled) Sub tray (Weighing 50 to 300 g/m2): 200 sheets : A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR, standard index paper, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm) : A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 16K, 16KR : A3, B4, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8K : A5, A5R, B6R (straight only), 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R
1 -1
1.3
I Outline 1.3.1
Type of paper
Staple A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)
A. Paper size
B. Applicable paper Plain paper, high-quality paper, book paper C. Paper weight Main tray: 50 g/m2 to 244 g/m2
1.4
Maintenance
Same as the main body Same as the main body
1.5
Machine data
24V/5V DC (supplied from the main body) When the main tray is pulled out: W 915 mm x D 656 mm x H 1020 mm When the main tray is set in: W 798 mm x D 656 mm x H 1020 mm When the main tray is removed: W 544 mm x D 656 mm x H 1020 mm
Power source: Dimensions:
Maximum power consumption: 110 VA
Weight:
80 kg
1.6
1 -2
UNIT COMPOSITION
2. UNIT COMPOSITION
I Outline
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
C [2]
fs503to1001c
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Paper conveyance section Stapler section Stacker section Main tray section Sub tray section
A B C
Sub tray paper path Main tray paper path (straight/sort/staple) Main tray paper path (only while in stapling)
1 -3
UNIT COMPOSITION
I Outline
Blank page
1 -4
PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION
1. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION
1.1 Composition
[1]
[2]
Symbol [1] [2] Item Conveyance path switching method Paper multi conveyance method Specification/mechanism Tray gate + solenoid Bypass gate + solenoid
fs503to2001c
2 -1
1.2
Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] [2] Conveyance motor (M1) Gate solenoid (SD2) [3] Bypass solenoid (SD5)
fs503to2002c
2 -2
1.3
1.3.1
Operation
Conveyance path switching
A. Tray gate control The tray gate switches the paper conveyance path between the main tray and the sub tray. The tray gate is normally set to the conveyance path to the main tray. When paper is exited to the sub tray, however, the gate is switched to the path to the sub tray through the drive of the solenoid (SD2). B. Bypass gate control The bypass gate is provided on the paper path to the stacker section. Even while in the staple operation, the bypass gate conveys the next page to reduce a loss of time for a high productivity. The drive of the bypass gate [1] is made by the bypass solenoid (SD5) [2]. The operation of SD5 is limited only to the small-sized paper (A4, B5 and 8.5 x 11) in the staple mode. For the 1st page on and after the 2nd copy, paper is sent to the regular route [3]. SD5 operates only on the 2nd page to send paper to the bypass route [4]. The 1st and 2nd pages are put upon one another to be conveyed to the stacker simultaneously. On and after the 3rd page, SD5 is released and paper is sent on the regular route a sheet of paper at a time. II Composition/Operation
[1]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
fs503to2003c
[1] [2]
Bypass gate Bypass solenoid (SD5)
[3] [4]
Regular route Bypass route
(1) In the case of the 1st copy The bypass solenoid (SD5) does not operate when the paper of the 1st copy is passing through it.
2 -3
PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION (2) In the case of the 2nd and subsequent copies
A specified period of time after the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the trailing edge of the 1st page of the 2nd copy, the bypass solenoid (SD5) turns ON to draw the 2nd page of the 2nd copy into the bypass route. A specified period of time after the PS4 detected the trailing edge of the 2nd page of the 2nd copy, the bypass solenoid turns OFF. SD5 does not turn on when the 3rd and subsequent pages are being conveyed.
[1]
II Composition/Operation FNS entrance sensor (PS4) Conveyance motor (M1) Bypass solenoid (SD5)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1] [2] 1st copy 2nd copy [3] [4] 3rd copy
fs503to2030c
Drawing of the 2nd page of the 2nd copy into the bypass
2 -4
SUB TRAY SECTION
2. SUB TRAY SECTION

2.1 Composition
[1]
fs503to2004c
Symbol [1]
Item Sub tray paper full detection Photo sensor
2.2
Drive
[1] [2]
fs503to2005c
[1]
Sub tray paper exit motor (M6)
[2]
Sub tray paper exit roller
2 -5
SUB TRAY SECTION
2.3
Operation
A. Sub tray paper full detection control When paper that has been exited into the sub tray gets to the specified thickness, the sub tray paper full sensor (PS30) turns ON to send the "sub tray paper full" information to the main body. Then, the main body displays the massage on the operation panel.
[1]
[2]
fs503to2006c
[1]
Paper exited
[2]
Sub tray paper full sensor (PS30)
B. Line speed switching control Paper conveyed by the conveyance motor (M1) is decelerated for each sheet of paper to be exited into the sub tray, thus preventing paper from having an uneven edge.
FNS entrance sensor (PS4) Sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1) Sub tray paper exit motor (M6) [2] Deceleration
[1]
[1] * Deceleration of the sub tray paper exit motor (M6) [2] High speed rotation
fs503to2031c
The time up to the deceleration is changed by the line speed on the main body side.
2 -6
STACKER SECTION
3. STACKER SECTION
3.1 Composition
[7]
[1]
[2] [6] [3]
[5]
[4]
fs503to2007c
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Item Stack assist method Staple alignment method /1 (sub scan direction) Staple alignment method /2 (sub scan direction) Staple alignment method /3 (sub scan direction) Staple paper exit method Staple alignment method /4 (sub scan direction) Alignment method (main scan direction) Paddle rotation
Specification/mechanism Paper pressure mechanism by means of the stack assist plate
Swing roller and the belt Flat-stapling stopper Paper exit arm belt discharge mechanism Guide roller and the belt Independent drive mechanism of the alignment plates
2 -7
STACKER SECTION
3.2
3.2.1
Drive
Stacker entrance roller/paddle drive
[1]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] Stacker entrance belt Swing roller Stacker entrance roller
[3]
[4] [5] [6] Stacker entrance motor (M13) Paddle Paddle motor (M2)
fs503to2008c
2 -8
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 3.2.2 Stack assist plate/rear stopper drive
STACKER SECTION
[1]
[2] [3] [6]

[4] [5]
fs503to2009c
[1] [2] [3]
Stack assist home sensor (PS32) Stack assist plate Rear stopper
[4] [5] [6]
Rear stopper home sensor (PS35) Rear stopper motor (M26) Stack assist motor (M24)
2 -9
STACKER SECTION 3.2.3 Intermediate roller/paper exit arm drive
[9] [8]
[1]
[10]
[1] [10]
[2] [3] [4]
[8]
[7]
[5]
[6]
fs503to2010c
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7) Intermediate roller open close motor (M25) Eccentric cam Intermediate roller home sensor (PS33) Paper exit arm
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
Paper exit arm motor (M23) Paper exit arm home sensor (PS9) Intermediate roller /Lw Coupling Intermediate roller /Up
2 -10
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 3.2.4 Alignment drive
STACKER SECTION
[6]
[1]
[2] [5]
[4]
[3]
fs503to2011c
[1] [2] [3]
Alignment plate /Rr Alignment motor /Rr (M5) Alignment home sensor /Rr (PS8)
[4] [5] [6]
Alignment motor /Fr (M22) Alignment home sensor /Fr (PS31) Alignment plate /Fr
2 -11
STACKER SECTION
3.3
3.3.1
Operation
Stacker conveyance speed control
Paper conveyed by the conveyance motor (M1) is sent to the stacker when the stacker entrance motor (M13) is decelerated a specified period of time after the stacker entrance sensor (PS5) turns ON and before it runs through the stacker entrance roller. 3.3.2 II Composition/Operation Intermediate roller control
The roller drive of the intermediate roller /Lw is transmitted from the main tray paper exit motor (M7) by the belt and the coupling, and the transmission of the conveyance power to paper is made by the pressure/release of the intermediate roller /Up. A. Non-staple mode control While in the non-staple mode, when the start button is turned ON, the intermediate roller /Up [1] is driven up to the nip standby position by the cam [2] of the intermediate roller open close motor (M25). The home position of the intermediate roller /Up open/close operation is detected by the intermediate roller home sensor (PS33) [3].
[1]
[2] [3]
fs503to2039c
[1] [2]
Intermediate roller /Up Cam of the intermediate roller open close motor (M25)
[3]
Intermediate roller home sensor (PS33)
2 -12
STACKER SECTION
While in the copy operation, the pressure/release of the intermediate roller /Up [1] onto the intermediate roller / Lw [2] is made by the intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7) [3]. When paper is being conveyed to the stacker, SD7 turns ON to release the nip, and paper that passes through the opening between the intermediate roller /Up [1] and the intermediate roller /Lw [2] is conveyed to the stacker. When paper is being exited, SD7 turns OFF and the intermediate roller /Up [1] is pressed against the intermediate roller /Lw [2] by the pressure of the spring. The paper is nipped before being exited.
[1]
fs503to2012c
[3] [2]
[4]
[1] [2]
Intermediate roller /Up Intermediate roller /Lw
[3] [4]
Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7) Paper
[2]
FNS entrance sensor (PS4) Intermediate roller open close motor (M25) Alignment motors /Fr (M22), /Rr (M5) Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
fs503to2032c
[1] [2] [3]
Start button ON Movement of the intermediate roller /Up to the nip standby position Nip release of the intermediate roller /Up
[4] [5]
Alignment operation Paper nip by the intermediate rollers /Up and /Lw
2 -13
STACKER SECTION B. Staple mode control
While in the staple mode operation, through the initial operation made when the start button is turned ON, the intermediate roller /Up [1] is moved to the evacuation position by the eccentric cam [2] that is driven by the intermediate roller open close motor (M25).
[1]
[2] [3]
fs503to2013c
[1] [2]
Intermediate roller /Up Eccentric cam
[3]
Intermediate roller home sensor (PS33)
2 -14
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 3.3.3 Stack assist control
STACKER SECTION
The stack assist plate is a paper pressure plate that is used to increase the speed to put paper in the stacker for an increased productivity. The stack assist plate [1] is driven by the stack assist motor (M24). When being conveyed to the stacker section, each sheet of paper is pressed at the position near the rear end of the paper [2] to be stacked at a speed faster than a free fall. The stack assist plate is driven by 65 from the home position in the staple mode and by 80 in the shift and straight mode. The home position is detected by the stack assist home sensor (PS32) [3]. II Composition/Operation
fs503to2014c fs503to2033c
[2]
[3] [1]
[1] [2]
Stack assist plate Paper
[3]
Stack assist home sensor (PS32)
Stacker entrance sensor (PS5) Stacker assist motor (M24) Forward Reverse
[1]
[1] [2] Start button ON Paper pressure by the stack assist plate [3]
[2] [3]
Movement of the stack assist plate to the evacuation position
2 -15
STACKER SECTION 3.3.4 Rear stopper control
The rear stopper is a paper rear stopper when paper is exited in the non-staple (straight/sort) mode. This shortens the conveyance distance to the main tray for an improved productivity. The rear stopper is driven and released by the rear stopper motor (M26) in the staple mode. The set state in the non-staple mode (the position at which paper is stopped by the rear stopper) is the home position of the rear stopper and this is detected by the rear stopper home sensor (PS35). 3.3.5 II Composition/Operation Alignment control
A. Horizontal alignment The horizontal alignment is made by the 2 alignment plates, that is, alignment plate /Fr and alignment plate /Rr. These 2 alignment plates are driven independently by each of the alignment motor /Fr (M22) and the alignment motor /Rr (M5). The home position of the alignment plate /Fr is detected by the alignment home sensor /Fr (PS31) and that of the alignment plate /Rr is detected by the alignment home sensor /Rr (PS8). (1) Straight mode In the straight mode, each sheet of paper sent to the stacker is aligned by the alignment plate /Fr and the alignment plate /Rr before being exited to the straight position.
2 -16
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 (2) Shift mode
STACKER SECTION
In the shift mode, each time a sheet of paper is sent to the stacker, the alignment plate /Fr [1] and the alignment plate /Rr [2] shift to the rear to convey the paper [3] to the shift position before exiting it.
[3]
[2]
[1]
fs503to2015c
[1] [2]
Alignment plate /Fr Alignment plate /Rr
[3]
Paper
Stacker entrance sensor (PS5) Alignment motor /Fr (M22) Alignment motor /Rr (M5)
[1] [2] [3]

[1] [2] [3] Start button ON Home position search Movement to the size position [4] [5] [6]
[4] [5]
[6]
fs503to2034c
Alignment operation for each sheet of paper Move the paper to the shift position in the rear Move the paper to the shift position in the front
2 -17
STACKER SECTION (3) Staple mode
In the staple mode, the alignment operation is made by the alignment plates /Fr and /Rr for each sheet of paper that has been sent to the stacker. After the last sheet of paper of the copy is conveyed to the stacker section, the alignment operation for the staple is made for stapling. B. Vertical alignment In the staple mode, for the vertical alignment of paper, the paper is pushed against the flat-stapling stopper by the paddle that is driven by the paddle motor (M2). The vertical alignment is assisted by the swing roller that is interlocked with the paddle by M2. II Composition/Operation
[2]
Stacker entrance sensor (PS5) Paddle motor (M2) Stapler motors /Fr (M31), /Rr (M30)
[1]
[1] [2] Start button ON Stapling of the 1st sheet of paper [3] Stapling
[3]
fs503to2035c
3.3.6
Stacker paper exit
A. Non-staple control In the non-staple mode, the paper exit is made by the nip of the intermediate rollers /Up and /Lw. B. Staple control In the staple mode, the paper exit is made by the paper exit arm that is driven by the paper exit arm motor (M23). The home position of the paper exit arm is detected by the paper exit arm home sensor (PS9).
[2]
Stapler motors /Fr (M31), /Rr (M30) Paper exit arm motor (M23) Paper exit arm home sensor (PS9)
[1]
[1] [2] Start button ON Stapling [4] [3]
[3]
[4]
fs503to2036c
Movement to the paper exit arm standby position Paper exit operation of paper bundle
2 -18
STAPLER SECTION
4. STAPLER SECTION
4.1 Composition
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
fs503to2016c
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4]
Item Stapler 45 rotation method Stapler movement method Staple scraps box Stapler
Specification/mechanism Mechanism with the joint use of the gear and the cam Movement mechanism with the belt With the box presence detection function provided, 150,000 staples can be contained Stapler integral with in-line clincher (staple cut type, flat clinch) Staple sheet cartridge
2 -19
STAPLER SECTION
4.2
4.2.1
Drive
Stapler movement/rotation
[7]
[8]
[1] [2]
[6] [5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Cam Stapler rotation home sensor (PS14) Stapler rotation motor (M4) Stapler /Rr [5] [6] [7] [8] Stapler /Fr Stapler movement motor (M11) Stapler movement home sensor (PS11) Belt
[4]
[3]
fs503to2017c
2 -20
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 4.2.2 Stapler
STAPLER SECTION
[1] [5] [2]

[4]
[3]
fs503to2018c
[1] [2] [3]
Staple cut/bending arm Stapler motors /Rr (M30), /Fr (M31) Eccentric cam
[4] [5]
Stapling arm Pressure plate
2 -21
STAPLER SECTION
4.3
4.3.1
Operation
Stapler movement control
For stapler movements, there are two types, that is, the horizontal movement of the stapler intervals and the rotation of the stapler /Rr. Movement is made according to the staple mode. The horizontal movement of the stapler is made by the stapler movement motor (M11). The stapler /Rr and the stapler /Fr are fixed on the upper side and the lower side of a belt that forms a loop and moved respectively in the opposite direction by the motor M11. The home position of the horizontal movement is detected by the stapler movement home sensor (PS11). II Composition/Operation The 45 rotational movement of the stapler /Rr for the one-corner stapling at rear is made by the stapler rotation motor (M4). The home position of the rotational movement is detected by the stapler rotation home sensor (PS14). A. 1 staple (1) 1 staple/at front When the start button is turned ON, the stapler movement motor (M11) also turns ON to move the stapler to the position according to the paper size. (2) Size movement in 1 staple/one-corner stapling at rear When the start button is turned ON, the stapler movement motor (M11) turns ON to move the stapler to the position according to the paper size. After a specified period of time, the stapler rotation motor (M4) also turns ON to rotate the stapler /Rr and move it diagonally. When a staple empty condition of the stapler /Rr is detected at the one-corner stapling at rear, M4 is driven to replace the cartridge and the stapler is returned to its vertical position. B. 2 staples When the start button is turned ON, the stapler movement motor (M11) also turns ON to move the stapler to the position according to the paper size.
2 -22
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 4.3.2 Staple control
STAPLER SECTION
The staple control is made by the stapler motors /Rr (M30) and /Fr (M31) to drive the eccentric cam. The inside [2] of the eccentric cam [1] is provided with the cam groove [4] of the pressure arm [3] and the pin [6] of the staple cut/clincher arm [5]. The outside [7] of the eccentric cam is also provided with the cam groove [9] of the stapling arm [8]. Each time the eccentric cam makes a 1/4 turn, each of the following operations is made: 1. paper pressure, 2. stapling, 3. staple cut/clinch, and 4. return to the home position. A series of the operations complete in a full turn. The home position is detected by the stapler home sensors /Rr (PS40), /Fr (PS41). II Composition/Operation
[5]
[1]
[9]
[4]
[7] [6]
[2]
[8]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Eccentric cam Inside Pressure arm Cam groove (for pressure arm) Staple cut/clinch arm [6] [7] [8] [9]
[3]
fs503to2019c
Pin (for staple cut/clinch) Outside Stapling arm Cam groove (for stapling arm)
2 -23
STAPLER SECTION A. Paper pressure
When the eccentric cam rotates 90 from the home position, the cam groove [1] on the inside drives the pin [3] provided on the pressure arm [2] in the arrow-marked direction. The pressure arm [2] drives the pressure plate [4] and presses the clinch side hard against the staple side [5] to press the paper [6]. At the same time, the pin [8] provided in the groove [7] on the outside of the cam drives the stapling arm [9]. The pin [10] at the tip of the stapling arm moves along the groove [12] of the pressure claw [11], and drives the pressure claw [11] with the lever to press the paper [13]. The following figure left shows a cam on the outside and the figure right shows a cam on the inside. II Composition/Operation
[6] [5]
[4] [3] [1] [10] [2] [11] [12]
[6]
[7]
[9] [8]
fs503to2020c
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Cam groove Pressure arm Pin Pressure plate Staple side Paper
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
Cam groove (for stapling arm) Pin Stapling arm Pin Pressure claw Groove
2 -24
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 B. Stapling control
STAPLER SECTION
When the eccentric cam rotates from 90 to 180, the cam groove [1] on the outside drives the pin [3] provided on the stapling arm [2] in the arrow-marked direction. The pin [4] at the tip of the stapling arm pushes up the stapling blade [5] to push out the staple [6], punch out the paper [7] and staple it. At the same time, to make preparation for the next stapling, the staple is bent at 90 by the staple bending blade [8].
[7] [5] [5] [4] [1]

[6]
[2] [8] [3]

fs503to2021c
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Cam groove Stapling arm Pin Pin at the tip
[5] [6] [7] [8]
Stapling blade Staple Paper Staple bending blade
2 -25
STAPLER SECTION C. Staple cut/clinch control
When the eccentric cam rotates from 180 to 270, the pin [1] provided on the inside drives the staple cut/clinch arm [2] in the arrow-marked direction. At the start of rotation, the lever operation of the staple cut/clinch arm [2] rotates the coupling metal fitting [3] to pull the pin [4] in the arrow-marked direction and the staple [7] inserted into the round hole [6] of the staple cut blade [5] is cut. Staple scraps that have been cut drop into the duct to be collected in the staple scraps box. With the further rotation of the eccentric cam, the tip of the presser metal fitting [8] that is interlocked with the staple cut/clinch arm [2] pushes down the clinch metal fitting [9] to clinch the staple [7] that has been cut. When the eccentric cam rotates up to 270, the clinch operation is completed. After completion of clinching, the II Composition/Operation eccentric cam rotates to the home position to complete a series of operations.
[8] [9] [9] [7] [5]
[8] [3]
[6]
[7]
[4] [1]
[5] [2]
fs503to2022c
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Pin Staple cut/clinch arm Coupling metal fitting Pin Staple cut blade
[6] [7] [8] [9]
Round hole Staple Presser metal fitting Clinch metal fitting
2 -26
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 D. Cartridge detection
STAPLER SECTION
The presence of a cartridge or the incorrect setting of a cartridge is detected by the cartridge set sensors /Rr (PS42), /Fr (PS43). When there is no cartridge or the cartridge is set incorrectly, an error message is displayed on the operation section. E. Staple detection When the staples run short, the staple empty sensors /Rr (PS44), /Fr (PS45) detect this condition and display an error message on the operation section. F. Staple tip detection II Composition/Operation
The tip of the staple is detected by the staple ready sensors /Rr (PS46), /Fr (PS47). While in the stapling operation, the staple ready sensors determine that the staples have been clogged when the PS46 and PS47 do not turn on within a specified period of time after the staple home sensors /Rr (PS 40), /Fr (PS41) turn off, and rotate the stapler motors /Rr (M30), /Fr (M31) in the reverse direction up to the home position. G. Staple scraps box detection The presence of a staple scraps box or the incorrect setting of a box is detected by the stapler scraps box set sensor (PS34). When there is no staple scraps box or it is set incorrectly, an error message is displayed on the operation section.
2 -27
MAIN TRAY SECTION
5. MAIN TRAY SECTION

5.1 Composition
[3]
[2]
[1]
fs503to2023c
Symbol [1] [2] [3]
Item Main tray up/down method Ejected paper alignment method (in the sub-scan direction) Main tray paper exit opening open/ close method
Specification/mechanism Wire driven horizontal up/down Decelerated paper exit + sponge roller alignment Belt/deformation cam drive
2 -28
MAIN TRAY SECTION
5.2
5.2.1
Drive
Tray up/down drive
[6]
[7]
fs503to2024c
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Counter reset sensor (PS15) Tray lower limit sensor (PS3) Tray up down motor (M3) Up/down pulley /Lw
[5] [6] [7]
Up/down wire Main tray Up/down pulley /Up
2 -29
MAIN TRAY SECTION 5.2.2 Main tray paper exit drive
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
fs503to2025c
[1] [2] [3]
Main tray paper exit motor (M7) Coupling Paper pressure arm
[4] [5]
Main tray paper exit roller Paper exit opening solenoid (SD9)
2 -30
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 5.2.3 Paper exit opening drive
MAIN TRAY SECTION
[6]
[1] [5] [2] [4]

fs503to2026c
[3]
[1] [2] [3]
Cam Paper exit opening motor (M8) Paper exit opening home sensor (PS12)
[4] [5] [6]
Main tray paper exit roller Paper exit opening unit Drive bar
2 -31
MAIN TRAY SECTION
5.3
5.3.1
Operation
Paper exit opening control
When paper is too long and protruding, the paper exit opening is opened and closed for alignment. There are 3 opening positions available according to the mode and the paper length. For paper shorter than the following length, the paper exit opening is opened neither in the non-staple mode nor the staple mode. Mode II Composition/Operation Non-staple Staple Staple Angle of the opening Approx. 27 Approx. 44 Approx. 55 Paper length in the sub scan direction More than 239 mm More than 400 mm More than 219 mm, less than 400 mm
For the open/close of the paper exit opening, the paper exit motor (M8) rotates and the deformed cam [1] lifts up the entire paper exit opening unit [2] to open the paper exit opening. The open/close of the paper exit opening is detected by the paper exit opening home sensor (PS12) [3].
[7] [6] [6] [5] [7] [4]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2] [3]
fs503to2027c
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Deformed cam Paper exit opening unit Paper exit opening home sensor (PS12) Position at 0
[5] [6] [7]
Position at 27 Position at 44 Position at 55
2 -32
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 A. Non-staple control When the paper length is less than 239 mm, paper exit unit is not opened. When the paper length is 239 mm or longer, paper exit unit is opened by 27.
MAIN TRAY SECTION
Turn ON the start button while in the M8 open the paper exit unit to about 27. Close the paper exit unit after the alignment. B. Staple control When the paper length is less than 219 mm, paper exit unit is not opened. When the paper length is 219 mm or longer and less than 400 mm, paper exit unit is opened by 55. When the paper length is 400 mm or longer, paper exit unit is opened by 44. Open angle is narrow for 400 mm or longer due to the differences of the number of stapled pages. # of stapled pages:Less than 400 mm 400 mm or longer C. Sub-set staple control Sub set staple control avoids exited papers misalignment when sub set staple is used. Paper holding arm is driven by paper exit solenoid (SD9). When stapled sheets of paper are exited, paper holding arm presses previously exited sheets since they are misaligned by staples. When exiting sheets without staple, paper holding arm does not operate. As control timing, SD9 is turned ON by staple operation. In predetermined time after stapled sheets go through stacker empty sensor (PS20), SD9 is turned OFF. The timing of turning OFF SD9 is when 2/3 of stapled sheets are exited. 100 pages 50 pages II Composition/Operation
fs503to2028c
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1] [2]
Paper Paper presser arm
[3]
Paper exit opening solenoid (SD9)
2 -33
MAIN TRAY SECTION 5.3.2 Main tray up/down control
The driving force of the tray up down motor (M3) rotates the up/down pulley by the belt and the gear to wind up the up/down wire. The main tray goes up or down according to the direction in which the up/down wire is wound up. When the up/down pulley /Lw rotates clockwise as seen from the front, the main tray goes up and when it rotates counterclockwise, the tray goes down. A. Non-staple up/down control According to the FS operation signal from the main body, the tray up down motor (M3) raises the tray until the tray upper limit sensor (PS2) turns ON. II Composition/Operation When paper passes through the main tray paper exit sensor (PS10), M3 lets down the tray. M3 raises up the tray again a specified period of time after PS2 turns OFF and stops it when PS2 turns ON. The above steps are repeated for each sheet of paper.
[2]
Main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) Tray upper limit sensor (PS2) Tray up down motor (M3) UP DOWN
[1]
[1] Start button ON [2] Paper exited
fs503to2037c
B. Staple control When the stacker empty sensor (PS20) detects the trailing edge of paper, the main tray is brought down by the tray up/down motor (M3). And M3 reverses the rotation after a specified period of time to bright up the tray. It stops when the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7) turns ON.
[2]
Stacker empty sensor (PS20) [3] Tray up down motor (M3) UP DOWN
[1]
[1] [2] Start button ON Paper bundle exited [3]
fs503to2038c
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7)
2 -34
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 C. Main tray paper detection
MAIN TRAY SECTION
The tray upper limit sensor (PS2) and the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7) maintain the distance between the upper surface of the paper exited in the main tray (or the main tray upper surface when no paper is exited) and the paper exit opening at a specified distance to prevent any uneven paper exit from occurring. While in the continuous print mode, the FS uses a software to count the number of sheets of paper exited and stops printing when the count reaches the maximum number of sheets loadable for each paper size. However, when paper has been exited is removed while in printing, the tray goes up to turn ON the counter reset sensor (PS15). This resets the software counter, thus allowing paper to be exited without limit. The tray lower limit sensor (PS3) detects the lowest limit of the tray. In the intermittent copy mode, the total number is not added up by the software counter and the PS3 is used to restrict the number of sheets of paper. II Composition/Operation
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
fs503to2029c
[1] [2] [3]
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7) Tray upper limit sensor (PS2) Counter reset sensor (PS15)
[4] [5]
Tray lower limit sensor (PS3) Main tray
2 -35
MAIN TRAY SECTION
Blank page
2 -36
sd501ma.book Page 1 Wednesday, March 16, 2005 11:35 AM
SERVICE MANUAL
Theory of Operation
SD-501
2005.03 Ver. 1.0
sd501ma.book Page i Wednesday, March 16, 2005 11:35 AM
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
OUTLINE
II
1.1 1.2 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 2.1 2.2 Entrance conveyance drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Horizontal conveyance drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Gate drive/subtray pressure/release drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Conveyance path switching operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Conveyance line speed switch control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Subtray exit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Subtray paper full detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
1. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 3.1 3.2 Right angle conveyance drive/alignment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Overlap drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Paper overlap control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Alignment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Right angle conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
3. FOLDING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.3 3.3.1 Folding entrance drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Folding conveyance drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Folding blade drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Folding main scan alignment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Folding sub scan alignment/center folding exit drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Guide shaft drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Folding entrance conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
sd501ma.book Page ii Wednesday, March 16, 2005 11:35 AM
CONTENTS 3.3.2 3.3.3 I Outline 3.3.4 3.3.5 4.1 4.2
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Folding main scan alignment control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Folding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Folding sub scan alignment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Guide shaft control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
4. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 4.2.1 4.2.2 Saddle stitching alignment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Saddle stitching hold drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Clincher up down drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Stapler/clincher movement drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Stapler/clincher drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Bundle arm rotation drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Bundle arm movement drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Bundle arm assist drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Bundle clip drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Saddle stitching alignment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Stapler/clincher movement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Saddle stitching hold control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Clincher up down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Stapler control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 Bundle arm control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Bundle arm assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Bundle clip control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6 4.3.7 4.3.8 5.1 5.2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
5. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 6.1 6.2 Bundle press stage up down drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Bundle press movement drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Bundle registration drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Bundle press drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 Bundle exit drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Bundle press stage up down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 Bundle press movement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 Bundle press control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 Bundle registration control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 Bundle exit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
6. TRIMMER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 Trimmer press drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92 Trimmer blade drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93 Trimmer board drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 Trimmer press control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 Trimmer blade control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 Trimmer board control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
ii
I OUTLINE
1.1
Type: Stapling method: Trimming method: I Outline More than 50 set 30 set More than 40 set More than 30 set More than 20 set
Type
Saddle stitching trimmer finisher Saddle stitching unit with fore-edge trimming and multi-folding function Inclined clinch method Movable blade + trimmer board method
Name:
1.2
Functions
Exits paper to the subtray without any process. Conveys paper to the succeeding device without any process. Exits paper to the bundle exit tray after being center folding and saddle stitching.
A. Functions Subtray exit: Coupling exit: Saddle stitching:
Saddle stitching with trimming: Exits to the bundle exit tray after being center folding, saddle stitching, and trimming processes. Multi center folding: Multi letter folding: Exits to the bundle exit tray after being center folding on one or more sheets of paper. Exits to the tri-folding tray after being letter folding process on one or more sheets of paper. B. Maximum tray capacity Subtray: Bundle exit tray: Center folding/trimming: 2 to 10 sheets in a bundle 11 to 20 sheets in a bundle More than 30 set 21 to 40 sheets in a bundle More than 20 set 41 to 50 sheets in a bundle More than 15 set Multi center folding: Tri-folding exit tray: Multi letter folding: 1 sheet 2 to 3 sheets 4 to 5 sheets 1 to 5 sheets 200 sheets
1-1
1.3
I Outline
Type of paper
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13 wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)
A. Coupling/subtray mode Paper size:
Paper weight: B. Saddle stitching mode Original size:
50 to 300 g/m2
A3, B4, A4R, B5R 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11R 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13 wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)
Paper weight:
50 to 244g/m2
Maximum saddle stitching sheets: Normal paper and coated paper: Paper weight 50 to 81 g/m2
2
Number of the sheets Plain paper 50 sheets 1 30 sheets *1 20 sheets

* * *
Coated paper 30 sheets 10 sheets 5 sheets 1

* *
1 1
82 to 91 g/m
15 sheets *1
*
92 to 130 g/m2 131 to 161 g/m

2
15 sheets 1 10 sheets 5 sheets
162 to 209 g/m2 210 to 244 g/m2 *1 Staple position:
One sheet can be switched to a thick paper (200 g/m2)
Can be automatically changed (90 to 165 mm) in accordance with paper size.
[1] [2]
15ant1c006na
[1] = [Paper size] /2 2 mm [2] = [Paper size] /4 2 mm
1-2
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Folding height:
15ant1c011na
Folding sheets A3 12 x 18 11 x 17 (401 mm or more) 2 to 5 sheets 6 to 15 sheets 16 to 30 sheets 31 to 50 sheets 35 mm or less 45 mm or less 50 mm or less 60 mm or less B4
[1] Folding height A4R 8.5 x 11R 16KR (261 mm to 300 mm) 45 mm or less Not defined Not defined B5R (260 mm or less) 8.5 x 14 8K (301 mm to 400 mm) 40 mm or less 50 mm or less 55 mm or less 65 mm or less
(The above information is applied when paper weight is 64 g/m2 and no thick cover is not used.) C. Trimming mode: Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, B5R, 8K, 16KR 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11R 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13 wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm) Paper weight: Maximum trimming sheets: 50 to 244 g/m2 50 sheets (80 g/m2) or 49 sheets (80 g/m2) + 1 sheet (200 g/m2) (The above is the number of the printed paper before folding. The number of fore-edge (after folding) is double.)
1-3
I Outline
[1]
D. Multi center folding mode Original size: A3, B4, A4R, B5R, 8K, 16KR 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11R 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13 wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm) Paper weight: 50 to 244 g/m2 Maximum folding sheets: 5 sheets (80 g/m2) Folding precision (for 1 sheet):
I Outline
[1]
15ant1c007na
[1] = [Paper size] /2 1.5 mm
[1]
[1] = 1.5 mm or less E. Multi letter folding mode: Original size: A4R, 8.5 x 11R Paper weight: 50 to 91 g/m2 Maximum overlay sheets: 5 sheets (80g/m2) Folding precision (for 1 sheet):
15ant1c008na
[1]
[2]
15ant1c009na
Original size A4R 8.5 x 11R
[1] 97.5 mm 2.5 mm 91.6 mm 2.5 mm
[2] 102.0 mm 2.5 mm 96.1 mm 2.5 mm
[2]
[1]
15ant1c010na
[1] = 1.5 mm or less [2] = 1.5 mm or less
1-4
1.4
Maintenance
Same as the main body. I Outline Same as the main body.
1.5
Machine data
100 to 240 VAC When the bundle exit tray is stored:W 1,170 mm x D 775 mm x H 1,020 mm When the bundle exit tray is pulled out:W 1,170 mm x D 1,441 mm x H 1,020 mm
Power source: Dimensions:
Maximum power consumption:270 W
Weight:
263 kg
1.6
Temperature: Humidity: NOTE
The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1-5
UNIT COMPOSITION
2. UNIT COMPOSITION
I Outline
[1]
[2]
[7]
[6]
[3]
[5] [4]
15ant1c001na
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Folding section Right angle conveyance section Bundle process section Left side view
[5] [6] [7]
Trimmer section Saddle stitching section Horizontal conveyance section
1-6
PAPER PATH
3. PAPER PATH
I Outline
15ant1c002na
A. Coupling exit/subtray exit mode
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1] [2]
Horizontal conveyance Subtray exit
[3]
Coupling exit
1-7
PAPER PATH B. Multi letter folding mode
I Outline
[1]
[4] [5]
[7]
[6]
[8]
[3]
[2]
[10]
[9]
15ant1c003na
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Stack to the right angle conveyance section Right angle conveyance Conveyance to the folding section 1st folding 2nd folding
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
Paper exit Stack movement of the paper exit Front side view Top side view Right side view
1-8
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 C. Multi center folding/saddle stitching mode (1) From the paper exit from the main body to the center folding
PAPER PATH
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[8]
[7]
15ant1c004na
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Stack to the right angle conveyance section Right angle conveyance Conveyance to the folding section Center folding (1st folding)
[5] [6] [7] [8]
Release from the folding roller Front side view Top side view Right side view
1-9
I Outline
PAPER PATH (2) From the center folding to the paper exit
I Outline
[1]
[7] [2]
[3]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[5] [6] [7] [8] Paper exit
15ant1c005na
Conveyance from the folding section to the saddle stitching section Movement by the bundle arm Movement by the clip Conveyance to the trimmer section (only for saddle stitching mode)
Stack movement of the paper exit Front side view Left side view
1-10
HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION
1. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION
1.1 Composition
[2] [3] [4]
[1]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] Item Entrance conveyance path switching method Subtray paper full detection method Subtray exit method Subtray conveyance path switching method Specification/mechanism Solenoid + gate Actuator + photo sensor
15ant2c001na
Roller pressure/release by the solenoid Solenoid + gate
2-1
1.2
1.2.1
Drive
Entrance conveyance drive
[1]
[2]
[4]
[1] [2] Entrance roller Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
[3]
[3] [4] Front side view Conveyance roller
15ant2c002na
1.2.2
Horizontal conveyance drive
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[1]
[1] [2] [3] Front side view Exit roller Conveyance roller [4] [5]
15ant2c003na
Horizontal conveyance motor (M2) Subtray exit roller
2-2
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 1.2.3 Gate drive/subtray pressure/release drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
15ant2c004na
[1] [2] [3]
Subtray exit roller Roller release solenoid /4 (SD4) Horizontal conveyance gate solenoid (SD3)
[4] [5] [6]
Horizontal conveyance gate Entrance gate solenoid (SD1) Entrance gate
2-3
1.3
1.3.1
Operation
Conveyance path switching operation
A. Entrance gate solenoid control The entrance gate switches the path to the horizontal conveyance section and one to the right angle conveyance section. The switch is conducted by the entrance gate solenoid (SD1). The right angle conveyance path is selected when SD1 turns OFF and the horizontal conveyance path is selected when it turns ON. In the coupling exit mode and the subtray exit mode, SD1 turns ON and sets the entrance gate to the horizontal conveyance section when the main body print signal turns ON. SD1 turns OFF after the paper exit. II Composition/Operation B. Horizontal conveyance gate control The horizontal conveyance gate switches the path to the subtray section and the coupling conveyance path to the succeeding device. The switch is conducted by the horizontal conveyance gate solenoid (SD3). The coupling conveyance path is selected when SD3 turns OFF and the subtray path is selected when it turns ON. 1.3.2 (M2). M1 and M2 turn ON when the main body start signal [1] turns ON. M1 switches its rotational speed in accordance with the main body line speed [3] when the main body exit sensor turns ON [2]. Then it switches its rotational speed to high speed [4] to convey the paper when it receives the paper trailing edge signal (when the paper trailing edge passes through the fusing). Conveyance line speed switch control
The conveyance is conducted by the entrance conveyance motor (M1) and the horizontal conveyance motor
[2]
Main body exit sensor Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
High speed Low speed
Horizontal conveyance motor (M2)
[1]
[1] [2] Main body start signal Main body exit sensor ON
[3]
[4]
[3] [4] M1 switching to a low speed
15ant2c005na
Main body paper trailing edge signal
2-4
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 1.3.3 Subtray exit control
When exiting the paper to the subtray, the paper is prevented to be misaligned by releasing the nipping of the subtray exit roller by the roller release solenoid /4 (SD4) to nip the paper only at the trailing edge and slowing down the paper by the subtray exit roller that is rotating in low speed for every paper. The horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS2) [1] and the subtray exit sensor (PS11) [2] detect the paper exited to the subtray.
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
15ant2c006na
[1] [2]
Horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS2) Subtray exit sensor (PS11)
[3] [4]
Roller release solenoid (SD4) Subtray exit roller
The roller release solenoid /4 (SD4) turns ON [2] to release the nipping of the subtray exit roller [3] after a specified period of time since the horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS2) detects the leading edge of paper [1]. SD4 turns OFF [5] and the subtray exit roller nips at the trailing edge of paper [6] after a specified period of time since PS2 detects the trailing edge of paper [4]. This control is conducted for every paper exited to the subtray.
[4]
Horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS2) Subtray exit sensor (PS11) Roller release solenoid /4 (SD4)
[1]
[1] [2] [3]
[2]
[3]
[5] [6]
[4] [5] [6]
15ant2c007na
Detection of the leading edge of paper SD4 ON Release of nip
Detection of the trailing edge of paper SD4 OFF Nipping at the trailing edge of paper
1.3.4
Subtray paper full detection control
The subtray paper full detection is conducted by the subtray paper full sensor (PS12) via the actuator. PS12 turns ON under normal circumstances. The subtray paper full condition is detected and the subtray paper full signal is transmitted to the main body when the actuator is pressed by stacked paper and PS12 turns OFF. Then, the main body displays the message on its operation panel.
2-5
RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION
2. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION

2.1 Composition
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
15ant2c008na
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4]
Item Alignment method (sub scan direction) Conveyance direction switching method Paper overlap method Gate + solenoid Stopper
Alignment method (main scan direction) Alignment claw + torque limiter Roller pressure/release by the solenoid
2-6
2.2
2.2.1
Drive
Right angle conveyance drive/alignment drive
[1]
[2]
15ant2c009na
[3] [11]
[10]
[9] [6] [7] [8]
[4] [5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Alignment claw Torque limiter Roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) Front side direction Top side view Roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] Right angle conveyance roller /4 Right angle conveyance roller /3 Right angle conveyance roller /2 Right angle conveyance motor (M6) Right angle conveyance roller /1
2-7
RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION 2.2.2 Overlap drive
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2] [5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Overlap stopper Overlap motor (M13) Right side view Overlap home sensor (PS17)
[4]
[5] [6] [7]
[3]
Front side view Right angle conveyance gate
15ant2c010na
Right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)
2-8
2.3
2.3.1
Operation
Paper overlap control
A. Overlap mechanism When the folding operation is conducted for more than one sheet of paper, they are overlapped in the right angle conveyance section, and then conveyed to the folding section. The overlap mechanism is the mechanism to overlap the paper in adequate paper conveyance order. The operation is conducted by the right angle conveyance gate [1] driven by the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) [7] and the overlap stopper [5] driven by the overlap motor (M13) [3]. The overlap home sensor (PS17) [4] detects the home position of the overlap stopper. The overlap stopper [5] is positioned at the position where the trailing edge of paper [2] is positioned 20 mm below from the right angle conveyance gate [1] in accordance with the paper size when it stands by for the paper. II Composition/Operation
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4] [6]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Right angle conveyance gate Trailing edge of paper Overlap motor (M13) Overlap home sensor (PS17)
[5]
[5] [6] [7] Overlap stopper Front side view
15ant2c011na
2-9
The first stacked sheet of paper [5] is conveyed while the overlap stopper is located at the standby position [4]. Before conveying the second paper, right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) turns ON to move the right angle conveyance gate [6] to the right [7]. At the time, overlap motor (M13) moves the overlap stopper 30 mm upward [3]. It transfers the stacked paper to the left side of the right angle conveyance gate. The right angle conveyance gate is replaced [9] to clear the conveyance path. The subsequent paper [8] passes the right side of the right angle conveyance gate and the paper is overlapped in adequate order. Then, M13 moves the overlap stopper downward [1]. The same as the second sheet is conducted until all of sheets are stacked. II Composition/Operation
[7]
[8]
[9]
[6]
[5]
[1] [4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Overlap stopper moving 30 mm downward Front side view Overlap stopper moving 30 mm upward Standby position of the overlap stopper 1st paper
[3] [2]
[6] [7] [8] [9] Right angle conveyance gate
15ant2c012na
Right angle conveyance gate moved 2nd paper Right angle conveyance gate replaced
2-10
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 B. Overlap control (1) Multi letter folding mode control
In the multi letter folding mode, up to 5 sheets are stacked in the right angle conveyance section and conveyed to the folding section. The multi letter folding is available only with paper of 50 to 91 g/m2 in weight and is unavailable with others. The overlap motor (M13) turns ON when the main body start signal [1] turns ON and moves the overlap stopper upward to its standby position. Turning ON the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) [3] after a specified period of time since the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of the paper, the right angle conveyance gate is switched, M13 moves the paper upward [4], and isolate the paper from the conveyance gate by transferring it to the left side of the right angle conveyance gate. Turning OFF SD2 [5], the conveyance gate opens and waits for the subsequent paper. Conveying the subsequent paper through the right side of the right angle conveyance gate [6] and detecting the trailing edge of paper by the entrance sensor (PS1) [7], M13 moves the overlap stopper downward [8]. When the trailing edge of paper passes under the right angle conveyance gate, SD2 turns ON [9] to switch the right angle conveyance gate and M13 moves up the overlap stopper [10] to send the conveyed sheets of paper to the left side of the right angle conveyance gate. Then, SD2 turns OFF [11] and stands by for the subsequent paper. The overlap stopper moves down to the standby position and stands by for the 1st paper of the subsequent set [12] after a specified period of time since PS1 detects the trailing edge of last paper of the set. II Composition/Operation
[4]
Entrance sensor (PS1) Overlap motor (M13) Up Down
[7] [10]
[12] [1] [2]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Main body start signal Overlay stopper moved to its standby position Right conveyance gate switched Paper isolated Conveyance path cleared Subsequent paper conveyed
[3] [5]
[6] [8] [9] [11]

[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
15ant2c074na
Trailing edge of the subsequent paper detected Paper moved downward Right conveyance gate switched Paper isolated Conveyance path cleared Overlay stopper moved to its standby position
2-11
RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION (2) Center folding/saddle stitching mode control
In the center folding and saddle stitching modes, 1, 2, or 3 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section. The number of the stacked sheets is different depending on its paper weight and the conveyance pattern. Normal paper (less than 130 g/m2): up to 3 sheets are stacked and conveyed to the folding section. Thick paper (more than 131 g/m2): due to the limit of the folding performance, up to 2 sheets are stacked and conveyed to the folding section. Normal paper II Composition/Operation For the 1st set, 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section at first. Similarly, 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section for the subsequent sheets. At the final conveyance, 2 sheets are conveyed (if the total number of the paper is even) or 1 sheet is conveyed (if the number is odd). It does not convey 3 sheets at a time for the odd case because the timing to transmit the information such as the page count, the paper type, and so on is too late when the printing is conducted from a PC. For the 2nd and following set, 3 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section at first to take adequate time to conduct the folding operation for the preceding set. At the final conveyance, 2 sheets are conveyed (if the total number of the paper is even) or 3 sheets are conveyed (if the number is odd). Thick paper Up to 2 sheets of paper can be stacked for the thick paper. For every set, 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section at first. Similarly, 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section for the subsequent sheets. At the final conveyance, 2 sheets are conveyed (if the total number of the paper is even) or 1 sheet is conveyed (if the number is odd). Using PI function The same as the thick paper control is conducted because the paper type information cannot be obtained in the print job using PI.
2-12
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 2.3.2 Alignment control
A. Alignment mechanism The alignment is conducted by driving the alignment claws [2] by the right angle conveyance motor (M6) [5] through the belt [3] and the torque limiter [4]. The alignment claws move to the rear of the shelter direction [7] and are stopped by the mechanical stoppers [1] through the torque limiter when M6 is rotating toward the paper conveyance direction. Rotating M6 in the reverse direction, the alignment claws push the edge of paper to conduct the alignment [6].
[1]
[3]
[2]
15ant2c013na
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Mechanical stopper Alignment claw Belt Torque limiter
[5] [6] [7]
Right angle conveyance motor (M6) Aligning direction Shelter direction
2-13
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION B. Alignment control
The right angle conveyance motor (M6) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON and the alignment claws move to the standby position [2] in accordance with the paper size. No alignment operation is conducted for the 1st paper. M6 rotates in the reverse direction to align paper with the alignment claws [3] after a specified period of time since the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of 2nd paper. Then, M6 rotates in the forward direction to replace the alignment claws to the standby position [4]. M6 rotates to convey the paper to the folding section [6] and evacuate the alignment claws to the home position after a specified period of time after the alignment operation [5] for the last paper of the set. After a specified period of time after the right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) detects the leading edge of paper, M6 rotates in II Composition/Operation the reverse direction to move the alignment claws to the standby position [7] for the subsequent copy.
[7]
Entrance sensor (PS1) Right angle conveyance motor (M6) Forward Reverse
Right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6)
[1] [2]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Main body start signal Alignment claws moved to the standby position Alignment operation Alignment claws moved back to the standby position [5] [6] [7]
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
15ant2c075na
Alignment operation Paper conveyed to the folding section Alignment claws moved back to the standby position
2-14
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 2.3.3 Right angle conveyance control
A. Right angle conveyance mechanism In the right angle conveyance, the right angle conveyance motor (M6) and the roller release solenoids /1 (SD5) [5] and /2 (SD6) [10] convey the paper. When conveying the paper to the overlap section, the paper falls vertically [6] to the overlap stopper [7] by its own weight. At the time, the press by the right angle conveyance roller /1 [3] is released by default since the conveyance direction is not the rotational direction of the right angle conveyance roller /1 [3] but the axial direction of the right angle conveyance roller /1. After stacking and aligning the specified number of papers, the roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) [5] turns ON to nip the paper and convey the paper to the position rotated 90 from the right side to the front side [8]. The roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) [14] is OFF to release the pressure of the folding entrance roller by default since the upper edge of the paper [1] passes over the folding entrance roller [13]. When conveying the paper from the right angle conveyance section to the folding section [12], the roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) [10] turns ON to release the pressure of the right angle conveyance roller /4 [9] and convey the paper to the folding section by nipping the paper with the folding entrance roller [13]. II Composition/Operation
[14]
[1] [2]
[13] [12] [11] [10]
[3] [4]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[8]
[7]
15ant2c014na
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Upper edge of the paper pass Entrance sensor (PS1) Right angle conveyance roller /1 Right angle conveyance sensor /1 (PS5) Roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) Paper conveyed to the overlap section Overlap stopper
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
Right angle conveyance Right angle conveyance roller /4 Roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) Right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) Paper conveyed to the folding section Folding entrance roller Roller release solenoid /3 (SD7)
2-15
RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION B. Conveyance control
The roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) turns ON to press the right angle conveyance roller /1 [2] after a specified period of time since the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of last paper of the set [1]. After the alignment operation [3], the right angle conveyance motor (M6) rotates in the forward direction to convey the paper to the front side [4] by rotating 90. At this time, the roller release solenoid (SD7) turns OFF a specified period of time after the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of paper and releases the pressure of the folding entrance roller /1 [5]. A specified period of time after the right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) detects the leading edge of paper, SD7 turns ON to pressure the folding entrance roller /1 and nip [6] the upper section of paper that has been conveyed to the front side. And also, a specified period of time after that, when the roller II Composition/Operation release solenoid /2 (SD6) turns ON to release the right angle conveyance roller /4 [7] and convey the paper to the folding section.
[1] [3]
Entrance sensor (PS1) Right angle conveyance motor (M6) Forward Reverse
[4]
Roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) Roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) Roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) Right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6)
[2]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Trailing edge of the last paper of the set detected Right angle conveyance roller /1 pressure Paper alignment Paper conveyance
[5]
[5] [6] [7]
[6]
[7]
15ant2c076na
Folding entrance roller pressure release Folding entrance roller pressure Right angle conveyance roller /4 pressure release
2-16
FOLDING SECTION
3. FOLDING SECTION
3.1 Composition
[6] [7] [8]
[1] [5]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] 1st folding method Alignment method (sub scan direction) Center folding exit /1 Center folding exit /2 Alignment method /2 (main scan direction) Multi letter folding exit stacking method 2nd folding method Item Alignment method /1 (main scan direction)
[4]
[3]
[2]
15ant2c015na
Alignment stopper Roller + folding blade Alignment stopper + torque limiter Belt with claw Guide shaft Belt with alignment claw Belt conveyance stack Roller + folding blade
2-17
FOLDING SECTION
3.2
3.2.1
Drive
Folding entrance drive
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] Folding entrance motor (M3) Right side view
[2]
[3] [4]
[1]
Folding entrance roller /1 Roller release solenoid /3 (SD7)
15ant2c016na
2-18
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 3.2.2 Folding conveyance drive
FOLDING SECTION
[7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[3] [6]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] One way clutch Oscillation connecting gear Folding conveyance motor (M4) Folding roller /2 Folding roller /1
[5]
[6] [7] [8] [9]
[4]
Right side view Exit belt Folding roller /3 Tri-folding exit clutch (CL1)
15ant2c017na
2-19
[2]
FOLDING SECTION 3.2.3 Folding blade drive
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[1] [7]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
[2]
2nd folding blade motor (M19)
15ant2c018na
1st folding blade motor (M18) Folding roller /2 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) 1st folding blade Folding roller /1 Right side view
2nd folding blade home sensor /2 (PS23) 2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22) 2nd folding blade Folding roller /3 Spring (pressing the folding rollers /2 and /3) Spring (pressing the folding rollers /1 and /2)
2-20
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 3.2.4 Folding main scan alignment drive
FOLDING SECTION
[1] [8]
[6]
[7]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[4]
[3]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
15ant2c019na
Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) Alignment stoppers /Rr Right side view Alignment claw /Fr
Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18) Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr2 (PS49) Folding main scan alignment motor /Rr (M14)
2-21
[2]
FOLDING SECTION 3.2.5
Folding sub scan alignment/center folding exit drive
[7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[6] [2] [5]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Folding alignment stoppers /Rt Home position stoppers /Rt Folding exit home sensor (PS24) Torque limiter Folding sub scan alignment motor (M8)
[4]
[6] [7] [8] [9]
[3]
Front side direction
15ant2c020na
Folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56) Folding exit claws Alignment stoppers /Lt
2-22
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 3.2.6 Guide shaft drive
FOLDING SECTION
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] Guide shaft home sensor (PS46) Guide shaft motor (M25)
[2]
[3] [4] Front side view Guide shaft
[1]
15ant2c021na
2-23
FOLDING SECTION
3.3
3.3.1
Operation
Folding entrance conveyance control
A. Mechanism The folding entrance motor (M3) and the roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) [5] conduct the folding entrance conveyance operation. The paper [1] conveyed from the right angle conveyance section is conveyed to the folding entrance with the pressure of the folding entrance roller /1 [7] released. Once the right angle conveyance is completed, SD7 [5] turns ON to pressure the nipping of the folding entrance roller /1 and the roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) [3] turns II Composition/Operation OFF to release the right angle conveyance roller /4, M3 convey the paper to the folding section. The folding entrance sensor (PS60) [6] detects the paper at the folding entrance.
[5]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Paper
[2]
[1]
[5] [6] [7] Roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) Folding entrance sensor (PS60) Folding entrance roller /1
15ant2c022na
Right angle conveyance roller /4 Roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) Right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6)
2-24
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 B. Control
FOLDING SECTION
The roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) turns ON to nip the paper with the folding entrance roller [2] after a specified period of time since the right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) detects the leading edge of paper [1], and then the roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) turns ON to release the nip of the right angle conveyance roller /4 [3] after a specified period of time. Then the folding entrance motor (M3) turns ON and conveys the paper to the folding section [4]. At the time, the folding conveyance motor (M4) rotates in the reverse direction [5] to prevent the paper from being caught between the folding rollers /1 and /2. SD7 turns OFF to release the pressure of the folding entrance roller [7] after a specified period of time since the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of last paper of the subsequent set [6] and it stands by for the paper of the subsequent set being conveyed to the front side of the right angle conveyance section. II Composition/Operation
[1]
Entrance sensor (PS1) Right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) Folding entrance motor (M3) Roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) Roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) Folding conveyance motor (M4) Forward Reverse
[4]
[6]
[2][3]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Last paper of the 1st set Folding entrance roller nipped
[5]
[5] [6] [7]
[7]
15ant2c078na
Caught-protection to the folding section Last paper of the subsequent set Nip of the folding entrance roller released
Nip of the right angle conveyance roller /4 released Folding entrance conveyance
2-25
FOLDING SECTION 3.3.2 Folding main scan alignment control
A. Mechanism In the folding main scan alignment, the alignment stoppers /Rr [5] driven by the folding main scan alignment motor /Rr (M14) stop at the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size, and then the alignment claws /Fr [2] driven by the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) conduct the alignment operation. The home position of the alignment claws /Fr is detected by the folding main scan alignment home sensors /Fr1 (PS18) [8] and /Fr2 (PS49) [7] and the home position of the alignment tab /Rr is detected by the folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) [4]. The alignment claws /Fr [2] convey [6] the paper by pushing its trailing edge once the paper passes the folding II Composition/Operation entrance roller /3 [3] and until the leading edge of paper contacts with the alignment stopper /Rr [5] because there is no conveyance roller between the folding entrance conveyance roller /3 and the alignment stopper /Rr.
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Front side direction Alignment claws /Fr Folding entrance roller /3 Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) [5] [6] [7] [8] Alignment stoppers /Rr Paper conveyance
15ant2c023na
Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr2 (PS49) Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18)
2-26
FOLDING SECTION
The folding main scan alignment motor /Rr (M14) drives the alignment stoppers /Rr to the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size when the main body start signal [1] turns ON. The folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) rotates in the forward direction to let [3] the alignment claws /Fr push the trailing edge of paper for conveyance after a specified period of time since the folding entrance sensor (PS60) detects the trailing edge of paper, and then M7 stops after a specified period of time [4]. The alignment stoppers /Rr push the leading edge of paper to conduct the alignment. M7 rotates in the reverse direction [5], and after a specified period of time it rotates in the forward direction to conduct the alignment again [6]. M7 rotates in the reverse direction to replace the alignment claws to the home position [7] when the 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) detects the completion of the folding operation. M7 starts rotating to replace the alignment claws to the home position for subsequent set when PS21 detects the completion of the folding operation since the 1st folding blade conducts the reciprocal operation in which the 1st folding blade home sensor / 1 (PS20) and the 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) counter changes their positions at each folding operation. M7 stops rotating when the folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18) detects the home position of the alignment claws. Transmitting the print termination signal from SD, M14 rotates to move the alignment stoppers to the home position [8]. It stops rotating when the folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) detects the home position of the alignment stoppers. II Composition/Operation
[2]
Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) Forward Reverse
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[8]
Folding main Forward scan alignment motor /Rr (M14) Reverse Folding entrance sensor (PS60)
Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18) Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr2 (PS49) Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19)
1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21)
[1]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Main body start signal Alignment stopper /Rr moved for appropriate paper size Paper conveyed by the alignment claws /Fr Alignment operation [5] [6] [7] [8]
15ant2c079na
Alignment claws /Fr shelter operation Alignment operation Alignment claws /Fr moved to the home position Alignment stoppers /Rr moved to the home position
2-27
FOLDING SECTION 3.3.3 Folding control
A. Mechanism Folding consists of the 1st folding and 2nd folding. The 1st folding is conducted in the multi letter folding mode, the multi center folding mode, and the saddle stitching mode. The 2nd folding is conducted only in the multi letter folding mode. In the 1st folding operation, the 1st folding blade [7] pushes and inserts the paper between the folding rollers /1 [8] and /2 [3]. The folding rollers /1 and /2 are pressured each other by the spring [2]. The 1st folding blade is driven by the 1st blade motor (M18) [4] via the crank mechanism [5]. In the 2nd folding operation, the 2nd folding blade [13] pushes and inserts the paper between the folding rollers /2 [3] and /3 [14]. The folding rollers /2 and /3 are pressured each other by the spring [15]. The 2nd folding blade is driven by the 2nd blade motor (M19) [10] via the crank mechanism [11]. The folding sensor /2 (PS44) [9], the folding sensor /1 (PS7) [1], and the folding passage sensor (PS8) [12] detect the paper.
[10]
[11]
[12] [13]
[14]
[15] [1]
[2]
[9]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Folding sensor /1 (PS7) Spring Folding roller /2
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c024na
Folding sensor /2 (PS44) 2nd folding blade motor (M19) Crank mechanism Folding passage sensor (PS8) 2nd folding blade Folding roller /3 Spring
1st folding blade motor (M18) Crank mechanism Right side view 1st folding blade Folding roller /1
2-28
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 B. Tri-folding control (1) Operation
FOLDING SECTION
After the initial operation, the 1st folding blade [8] is at the standby position /1 [5]. In the actuator [7], the 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) [3] turns ON and the 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) [6] turns OFF. When the paper [9] is conveyed to the folding section and the 1st folding blade motor (M18) is rotated [2], the crank [4] rotates 90 to project the 1st folding blade to the paper and push the paper [12] between the folding roller /1 [10] and /2 [11] with its edge. At the time, the actuator also rotates 90 so that PS21 [3] and PS20 [6] turns OFF and ON respectively. M18 keeps rotating in the same direction [13], and then the crank [4] stops when it reaches at the standby position /2 [1] (PS20 turns OFF) where is 180 opposite from the standby position /1. In the 1st folding operation for the subsequent set, M18 rotates in the reverse direction [14] and the crank [4] also rotates 180 in the reverse direction to conduct the 1st folding operation. The 2nd folding operation is operated as in the 1st folding operation. II Composition/Operation
[11] [10]
[12]
[9]
[8] [14]
[7]
[13]
[6]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Standby position /2 Projecting position
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] 1st folding blade Paper Folding roller /1 Folding roller /2 Paper inserted
[1]
15ant2c025na
1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) Crank Standby position /1 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) Actuator
Rotational direction to the standby position /2 1st folding for the subsequent set
2-29
FOLDING SECTION (2) Control
When the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) stops rotating at the completion of the paper alignment operation, the 1st folding blade motor (M18) turns ON and starts rotating in the reverse direction. The 1st folding blade folds and inserts the paper between the folding rollers /1 and /2. When the 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) turns ON, the folding conveyance motor (M4) turns ON to conduct the 1st folding [2]. M18 stops when PS20 turns OFF. Then, M4 turns OFF and the 1st folding operation is completed [4] after a specified period of time since the folding passage sensor (PS8) detects the leading edge of paper. After a specified period of time since PS8 turns ON, the 2nd folding blade motor (M19) turns ON and rotates in the reverse direction to start the 2nd folding operation. When the 2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22) turns II Composition/Operation ON, M4 rotates in high speed to perform the 2nd folding, and then the tri-folded paper is conveyed to the trifolding exit. M19 stops when PS22 turns OFF. In the 1st folding operation for the subsequent set, M18 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the 1st folding [7] and stops rotating when the 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) turns ON [8]. In the 2nd folding operation, M19 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the 2nd folding [9] and stops rotating when the 2nd folding blade home sensor /2 (PS23) turns ON [10].
[1] [2]
Folding conveyance motor (M4)
[4]
[5]
[7]
[9]
Reverse Folding main Forward scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) Reverse 1st folding blade motor (M18) Forward Reverse
1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) 2nd folding blade motor (M19) Forward Reverse
2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22) 2nd folding blade home sensor /2 (PS23) Folding passage sensor (PS8)
[3]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Paper alignment operation completed 1st folding 1st folding blade motor (M18) stopped 1st folding completed 2nd folding by folding rollers /2 and /3 2nd folding
[6]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[8]
[10]
15ant2c080na
2nd folding blade motor (M19) stopped 1st folding by M18 rotating the forward direction M18 stopped 2nd folding by M19 rotating the forward direction M19 stopped
2-30
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 C. Tri-folding exit control (1) Operation
FOLDING SECTION
In the multi letter folding exit, the driving force of the folding conveyance motor (M4) is transmitted via the tri-folding exit clutch (CL1). CL1 turns ON and the exit belt [4] is driven approximately 7 mm to convey the paper to the front side for every paper exit. The tri-folding paper full sensor (PS10) [3] detects the paper when it is reached at the front, and then the main body displays the message on its operation panel. II Composition/Operation
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] Tri-folding exit sensor (PS9) Right side view [3] [4]
15ant2c081na
Tri-folding paper full sensor (PS10) Exit belt
(2) Control The tri-folding exit clutch (CL1) turns ON and drives the exit belt [1] and stops it [2] after a specified period of time when the tri-folding exit sensor (PS9) detects the leading edge of paper. The folding conveyance motor (M4) stops [3] after a specified period of time since PS9 detects the trailing edge of paper.
Folding conveyance motor (M4) Tri-folding exit clutch (CL1) Tri-folding exit sensor (PS9)
[1]
[1] [2] Exit belt driven Exit belt stopped [3]
[2] [3]
15ant2c082na
Folding conveyance motor (M4) stopped
2-31
FOLDING SECTION D. Center folding control
When the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) stops at the completion of the paper alignment operation, the 1st folding blade motor (M18) turns ON and rotates in the reverse direction [2] to let the 1st folding blade insert the paper between the folding rollers /1 and /2. When the 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) turns ON, the folding conveyance motor (M4) rotates in the reverse direction to rotate the folding rollers /1 and /2 in the reverse direction to release the paper. When PS20 turns OFF, M18 and M4 stop rotating [3]. In the folding operation for the subsequent set, M18 rotates in the forward direction [4] and it stops when the 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) turns ON [5]. II Composition/Operation
[1]
Folding conveyance motor (M4) Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
[2]
[4]
1st folding blade Forward motor (M18) Reverse 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21)
[3]
[1] [2] [3] 1st folding blade is projected with the paper Folding conveyance motor (M18) rotating the reverse direction M18 and M4 stopped [4] [5]
[5]
15ant2c083na
M18 rotating the forward direction M18 rotating the reverse direction
2-32
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 3.3.4 Folding sub scan alignment control
FOLDING SECTION
A. Mechanism The folding sub scan alignment operation is conducted in the multi letter folding mode and is conducted with the folding exit claws [13] and the folding alignment stoppers /Rt [3] driven by the folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) [8]. The folding exit claws move to the right [14] and the folding alignment stoppers /Rt move to the left [2] when M8 rotates in the reverse direction [9]. The folding alignment stoppers /Rt are contacted with the alignment stopper [1] and stopped by the torque limiter [7]. The folding exit claws move to the positions for the paper width of A4R or 8.5 x 11R and conduct the folding sub scan alignment operation, and then the folding is conducted. In the multi center folding mode and the saddle stitching mode, M8 rotates in the forward direction to move the folding exit claws to the left [11] after the folding operation. Once the folding exit claws make a round, they conduct the paper exit operation to the saddle stitching section. At the time, the folding alignment stoppers /Rt moving to the right [4] are contacted with the alignment stopper [5] and stopped by the torque limiter [7]. The home position of the folding exit claws in the alignment operation is detected by the folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56) [12]. The initial position and the center folding exit operation are detected by the folding exit home sensor (PS24) [6]. II Composition/Operation
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[1] [2]
[10]
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[9]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Alignment stopper
[8]
[7]
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
15ant2c026na
Folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) M8 rotated in the reverse direction Folding sensor /2 (PS44) Direction at the center folding exit operation Folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56) Folding exit claws Direction at the alignment operation (to the right)
Direction at the alignment operation (to the left) Folding alignment stoppers /Rt Direction at the center folding exit operation (to the right) Home position stopper Folding exit home sensor (PS24) Torque limiter
2-33
FOLDING SECTION
B. Folding sub scan alignment control The folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) rotates in the reverse direction to conduct the alignment operation in the sub scan direction [2] after a specified period of time since the right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) detects the trailing edge of paper and the alignment operation in the main scan direction is conducted [1]. When the folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56) detects the folding exit claws, M8 conducts the alignment by pressing the side of the paper, and then it stops [3] The M8 conducts the shelter operation and stops [4] after a specified period of time since PS6 detects the trailing edge of paper. II Composition/Operation
[1]
Right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) Folding sub scan alignment motor (M8) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
Folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56)
[2]
[1] [2] Alignment operation in the main scan direction Alignment operation in the sub scan direction [3] [4]
[3]
[4]
15ant2c084na
M8 stopped Shelter operation
C. Center folding exit operation The folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) does not conduct the alignment operation in the sub scan direction in the multi center folding/saddle stitching mode. It conducts the operation only when it exits the paper to the saddle stitching section. M8 drives the folding exit claws to conduct the paper exit operation [2] to the saddle stitching section after a specified period of time since the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) completes the realignment operation in the main scan direction [1] (after the center folding operation). After a specified period of time since the folding sensor /2 (PS44) detects the trailing edge of paper, M8 rotates in low speed [3] and conduct the home position search operation, and then it stops [4] when the folding exit home sensor (PS24) turns ON.
[1]
Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) Folding sub scan alignment motor (M8) Forward Reverse
[2]
[3]
[4]
Reverse
Folding exit home sensor (PS24) Folding sensor /2 (PS44)

15ant2c085na
[1] [2]
Realignment operation in the main scan direction Paper exit operation started
[3] [4]
M8 switched to the low speed Stopped at home position
2-34
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 3.3.5 Guide shaft control
FOLDING SECTION
A. Mechanism The guide shaft [2] holds the fold line [4] from the bottom and makes certain of the stack [3] in the saddle stitching section when the folding exit claws [7] exit the folded paper [1] to the saddle stitching section. The guide shaft is projected [5] in sync with the paper exit only when the first folded paper for each set is exited and put away immediately to the folding section [6]. In the subsequent paper exit, the guide shaft does not operate because the paper [3] stacked in the saddle stitching section works as the guide.
[3]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Folded paper Guide shaft Stacked paper Fold line [5] [6] [7]
[2]
15ant2c027na
Projection direction of the guide shaft Storage direction of the guide shaft Folding exit claws
2-35
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[1]
FOLDING SECTION B. Guide shaft control
The guide shaft motor (M25) turns ON [2] and the guide shaft is projected after a specified period of time since the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) completes the realignment operation in the main scan direction [1] (after the folding operation). The guide shaft conducting the back and forth operation by the belt rotation stops when the guide shaft home sensor (PS46) turns ON [3].
[1]
II Composition/Operation Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) Forward Reverse
[2]
[3]
Guide shaft motor (M25) Guide shaft home sensor (PS46)

15ant2c086na
[1] [2]
Realignment operation in the main scan direction Guide shaft projected
[3]
Guide shaft motor (M25) stopped
C. Folding unit lock control During the print operation, the folding unit lock solenoid (SD8) locks the folding unit to prevent the guide shaft or the folding exit claws from damage due to pulling out the folding unit by mistake. When the paper get jammed, the positions of the guide shaft and the folding exit claws are monitored. SD8 turns OFF and releases the lock only when both the folding exit home sensor (PS24) and the guide shaft home sensor (PS46) detect the home position.
2-36
SADDLE STITCHING SECTION
4. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION

4.1 Composition
[3] [4] [5]
[1]
[2]
15ant2c028na
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] method Clincher method Stapler method
Item
Bundle processing section conveyance Arm rotation + paper clip conveyance Clincher up down movement, solenoid clinch method Stapler and clincher driven separately by motor Belt Alignment plate
Stapler movement method Alignment method
2-37
4.2
4.2.1
Drive
Saddle stitching alignment drive
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9) Folding sensor /2 (PS44) Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28) Front side view
[4]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[2] [3]
15ant2c029na
Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt (PS29) Saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16) Saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt Saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt
4.2.2
Saddle stitching hold drive
[8]
[7]
[1] [6] [5] [4] [3]

[1] [2] [3] [4] Saddle stitching hold /Up Arm Left side view Spring [5] [6] [7] [8] Eccentric cam Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27) Saddle stitching hold motor (M21) Stapler
[2]
15ant2c030na
2-38
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 4.2.3 Clincher up down drive
[8]
[7]
15ant2c031na
[6]
[1]
[2] [5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Left side view Roller Eccentric cam Clincher up down home sensor (PS26)
[4]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[3]
Clincher up down motor (M20) Spring Clinchers /Rt, /Lt Saddle stitching hold /Lw
2-39
SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 4.2.4 Stapler/clincher movement drive
[1]
[8]
[2]
[4]
[7]
[3]
[5] [6]
[1]
15ant2c032na
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Top side view Stapler /Rt Clincher /Rt Front side view
[5] [6] [7] [8]
Stapler movement home sensor (PS25) Stapler movement motor (M15) Clincher /Lt Stapler /Lt
2-40
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 4.2.5 Stapler/clincher drive
[8]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Stapling arm Staple bending arm Clincher plate Clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10) [5] [6] [7] [8] Staple Left side view Eccentric cam
15ant2c077na
Stapler motors /Rt (M29), /Lt (M39)
2-41
[1]
SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 4.2.6 Bundle arm rotation drive
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Bundle arm Slide guide Left side view Bundle arm rotation motor (M22) [5] [6] [7] Guide shaft Fulcrum shaft
15ant2c033na
Bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31)
2-42
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 4.2.7 Bundle arm movement drive
[1] [3]
[2]
[4] [6]
[1] [2] [3] Bundle arm Guide shaft Folding sensor /2 (PS44) [4] [5] [6]
[5]
Bundle arm motor (M10)
15ant2c034na
Bundle arm home sensor (PS32) Fulcrum shaft
2-43
SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 4.2.8 Bundle arm assist drive
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2] [4]
[1] [2] [3] Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) Left side view Bundle arm assist plate [4] [5]
15ant2c035na
Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38) Bundle arm assist motor (M26)
2-44
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 4.2.9 Bundle clip drive
[9]
[10]
[1]
[8] [7]
[6]
[5] [2] [4] [3]

[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Release roller Wire Spring Release plate /Up Clip
15ant2c036na
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) Bundle clip motor (M11) Left side view Bundle clip lower limit motor (PS30) Release plate /Lw
2-45
4.3
4.3.1
Operation
Saddle stitching alignment control
A. Mechanism In the saddle stitching alignment, the saddle stitching alignment plates /Lt [2] and /Rt [8] align the center folded paper [5] in the sub scan direction. The saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16) [3] drives the saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt [2] in the sub scan direction via the belt by rotating in the forward and reverse directions. The saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt moves to the position for the appropriate paper size when the main body start signal turns ON, and it does II Composition/Operation not move during the print operation. It return to the position at the saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt (PS29) [4] after the print operation. The saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9) [7] drives the saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt [8] in the sub scan direction via the belt by rotating in the forward and reverse directions. The alignment operation is conducted by M9 by rotating in the forward and reverse directions every time the center folded paper is conveyed. It return to the position at the saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28) [6] after the print operation.
[7]
[8] [1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5] [4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Front side direction Saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt Saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16) Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt (PS29) [5] [6] [7] [8] Paper Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28) Saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9) Saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt
15ant2c037na
2-46
The saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON and the saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt moves to the position for the appropriate paper size [2]. The saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9) rotates in the forward direction and the saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt conducts the preliminary alignment operation [4] when the folding sensor /2 (PS44) at the exit of the folding section detects the trailing edge of the paper [3]. Then, M9 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the alignment operation [5] when the paper is stacked at the stapler position. After a specified period of time, M9 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the saddle stitching alignment plate to its home position and stands by for the subsequent set [6]. For the last paper of the set [7], M9 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the saddle stitching alignment plate to its home position when the saddle stitching press motor (M21) [8] is completed with holding the paper. II Composition/Operation
[7]
Folding sensor /2 (PS44) Saddle stitching Forward alignment motor Reverse /Rt (M9) Saddle stitching Forward alignment motor Reverse /Lt (M16) Saddle stitching press motor (M21)
[1] [2]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Main body start signal Moved for appropriate paper size Detected the trailing edge of paper Preliminary alignment operation Alignment operation
[3] [4]
[5]
[6] [7] [8] [9]
[6]
Moved to the home position Last paper of the set
[8]
[9]
15ant2c087na
Held the paper with the saddle stitching hold Moved to the home position
2-47
SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 4.3.2 Stapler/clincher movement control
A. Mechanism The staplers/clinchers move to the stapling position in accordance with the paper size. The stapling position is different for every paper size to make the stapling distance half of the paper size. The staplers /Rt [10] and /Lt [8] are fixed to the belt /Up [9] and the clinchers /Rt [2] and /Lt [4] to the belt /Lw [1]. They are moved in the sub scan direction by the stapler movement motor (M15) [5] via the connecting shaft [6]. To prevent the tooth skipping of the belts /Up and /Lw at the maintenance, the gear-shaped rotating knob [7] is provided on the connecting shaft [6]. Rotating the knob, you can manually move the staplers /Rt and /Lt and the clinchers /Rt and /Lt simultaneously. II Composition/Operation
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[6]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Belt /Lw Clincher /Rt
[4]
[3]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[2]
[1]
15ant2c038na
Connecting shaft Rotating knob Stapler /Lt Belt /Up Stapler /Rt
Stapler movement home sensor (PS25) Clincher /Lt Stapler movement motor (M15)
B. Control The stapler movement motor (M15) rotates in the forward direction when the main body start signal turns ON and moves the staplers and the clinchers to the position for the appropriate paper size. They go back to their home position at the end of the printing operation.
2-48
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 4.3.3 Saddle stitching hold control
A. Mechanism The saddle stitching hold is the mechanism to prevent the paper misalignment at stapling. The saddle stitching hold /Up [1] moves down to the saddle stitching hold /Lw [2] at its lower position and hold the center folded paper [3] at the fold line from both up and down. The eccentric cam [5] moves the saddle stitching hold /Up [1] up and down via the arm [6].
[6]
[1]
[5] [2]
[3]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] Saddle stitching hold /Up Saddle stitching hold /Lw Center folded paper [4] [5] [6] Left side view Eccentric cam Arm
15ant2c039na
2-49
The saddle stitching hold /Up [6] is enforced by the spring [3] toward the saddle stitching hold /Lw [5]. When the saddle stitching press motor (M21) rotates the eccentric cam [2] via the gear [1], the arm [4] moves along with the shape of the eccentric cam and the saddle stitching hold /Up is lowered by the spring [3]. The saddle stitching hold /Up [6] holding the center folded paper at its lower position is pushed up to its upper position by the saddle stitching hold /Lw [5] during the stapling operation. This allows the paper to be moved from the lower position to the upper position without any misalignment. The saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27) [8] detects the home position of the eccentric cam.
[8] [6] [7] [1]
[5] [4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Gear Eccentric cam Spring Arm [5] [6] [7] [8]
[3]
Saddle stitching hold /Lw Saddle stitching hold /Up Front side direction
[2]
15ant2c040na
Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27)
2-50
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 B. Control (1) Saddle stitching mode
At the end of the paper alignment operation [1], the saddle stitching press motor (M21) rotates to move the saddle stitching hold /Up downward [2] and hold the paper between the saddle stitching holds /Up and /Lw. Then, the clincher up down motor (M20) starts rotating and the saddle stitching hold /Up is pushed up by the saddle stitching hold /Lw while holding the paper [3]. M20 rotates in the reverse direction and lowers the saddle stitching hold /Lw [5] when the clinching operation [4] is started. The saddle stitching hold /Up is also lowered by the spring. M21 turns ON and go back the saddle stitching hold /Up to its standby position [6] after a specified period of time since the clinching operation is started. II Composition/Operation
[1]
Saddle stitching Forward alignment motor /Rt (M9) Reverse Clincher up down Forward motor (M20) Reverse Clinchers /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10) Saddle stitching press motor (M21) Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27)
[5]
[2]
[1] [2] [3] Alignment operation Saddle stitching hold /Up moved down Saddle stitching hold /Lw moved up [4] [5] [6]
[3]
[4]
[6]
15ant2c088na
Clinching operation Saddle stitching hold /Lw moved down Saddle stitching hold /Up moved up
(2) Multi center folding mode At the end of the paper alignment operation [1], the saddle stitching press motor (M21) rotates to move the saddle stitching hold /Up downward [2] and stack the paper securely. Then, M21 keeps rotating to move the saddle stitching hold /Up upward to its standby position [3].
[1]
Saddle stitching Forward alignment motor Reverse /Rt (M9) Saddle stitching press motor (M21) Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27)
[2]
[1] [2] Alignment operation Saddle stitching hold /Up moved down [3]
[3]
15ant2c089na
Saddle stitching hold /Up moved up
2-51
SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 4.3.4 Clincher up down control
A. Mechanism The clincher shelters at the lower position to obtain space between the stapler and the clincher when the paper is conveyed between them. After the alignment operation, the saddle stitching hold /Up [7] moves down and holds the center folded paper [6]. Then the eccentric cam [5] drives the saddle stitching hold /Lw [2] and the clincher [3] to push up the saddle stitching hold /Up [7] to the position where the stapler [1] is positioned while holding the center folded paper.
[1]
[2] [7] [3]
[6]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Stapler Saddle stitching hold /Lw Clincher Eccentric cam [5] [6] [7]
[4]
Left side view Center folded paper Saddle stitching hold /Up
15ant2c041na
2-52
The clincher [7] moves down to the lower position by its own weight and moves upward by the clincher up down motor (M20). The roller [2] attached to the arm [5] is pushed up and the clincher is contacted with the stapler when M20 rotates the eccentric cam [3]. The paper between the clincher and the stapler is hold securely by the spring [6]. Once the stapling operation is completed, M20 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the eccentric cam, and then the clincher moves down by its own weight.
[3]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[9] [5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Left side view Roller Eccentric cam Clincher up down home sensor (PS26) Arm
[2]
[6] [7] [8] [9]
[5]
Spring
[4]
[3] [2]
15ant2c042na
Clinchers /Rt, /Lt Saddle stitching hold /Lw Front side direction
2-53
[8]
SADDLE STITCHING SECTION B. Control
The clincher moves up or down only in the saddle stitching mode. Once the saddle stitching press motor (M21) moves down the saddle stitching hold /Up [1], the clincher up down motor (M20) rotates in the forward direction to move up the clinchers /Rt and /Lt and the saddle stitching hold /Lw [2]. M20 is stopped when the clincher up down home sensor (PS26) turns ON. M20 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the clinchers /Rt and /Lt and the saddle stitching hold /Lw when the clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10) starts the clinching operation [4]. They are stopped at the lower position [5] when PS26 turns OFF. II Composition/Operation
[2]
Clincher up down motor (M20) Forward Reverse
[3]
[5]
Clincher up down home sensor (PS26) Clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10) Saddle stitching press motor (M21)
[1]
[1] [2] [3] Saddle stitching hold /Up stopped at lower position Clinchers /Rt and /Lt moved up Clinchers /Rt and /Lt stopped at the upper position [4] [5]
[4]
Clinching operation
15ant2c090na
Clinchers /Rt and /Lt stopped at lower position
2-54
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 4.3.5 Stapler control
A. Mechanism The stapler operation is conducted by the stapler motors /Rt (M29) and /Lt (M30) [10] and the clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10) [5]. The stapler operation is detected by the stapler home sensors /Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3) [8] and the clincher start sensors /Rt (HS2) and /Lt (HS4) [11]. HS1, HS2, HS3, and HS4 are hall element sensors and control the position of the magnet [12] of the rotating eccentric cam [9]. M29 and M30 [10] drive the staple bending arm [3] and the stapling arm [2] via the eccentric cam [9]. The staple bending arm bends the rolled staple [6] into the U-shape and the stapling arm staples it toward the clincher. Then the SD9 and SD10 bend the staple by driving the clincher plate [4]. The stapling operation is completed by these operations. The staple empty switches /Rt (SW1) and /Lt (SW2) [7] detect whether the staple or cartridge is set or not. II Composition/Operation
[10]
[11]
[12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
15ant2c091na
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Front side direction Stapling arm Staple bending arm Clincher plate Clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10) Staple Staple empty switches /Rt (SW1) and /Lt (SW2)
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
Stapler home sensors /Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3) Eccentric cam Stapler motors /Rt (M29), /Lt (M30) Clincher start sensors /Rt (HS2) and /Lt (HS4) Magnet
2-55
SADDLE STITCHING SECTION B. Control (1) Stapling control
The stapler motors /Rt (M29) and /Lt (30) start the stapling operation [2] when the clincher up down home sensor (PS26) detects that the clinchers /Rt and /Lt are contacted with the stapler unit [1]. The clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10) bend the staple and the stapling operation is completed when the clincher start sensors /Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3) in the stapler unit turn ON [3]. M29 and M30 stop and return to the home position [4] when the stapler home sensors /Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3) detects the home position.
[1]
Clincher up down home sensor (PS26) Stapler motors /Rt (M29), /Lt (M30) Clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10) Stapler home sensors (HS1) and /Lt (HS3) Clincher start sensors /Rt (HS2) and /Lt (HS4)
[2] [3]
[1] [2] Clincher contacted Stapling operation [3] [4]
[4]
Clinching operation Returned to the home position
15ant2c092na
(2) Staple and cartridge detection When the remaining amount of the staple becomes 20 or the cartridge is not set, the staple empty switches /Rt (SW1) and /Lt (SW2) turn ON and the main body displays the message on its operation panel.
2-56
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 4.3.6 Bundle arm control
The bundle arm [4] rotates and moves in the sub scan direction. It rotates to convey the paper from the stapling section to the bundle clip section and moves in the sub scan direction to catch/release the paper. In the multi center folding mode, the bundle arm rotates to the stapling position after the last paper of the set is conveyed. In the saddle stitching mode, it rotates after the stapling operation. By moving the bundle arm, the tip of the bundle arm is inserted under the fold line of the paper and the paper is caught [1]. The caught paper is conveyed to the bundle clip section [2] by the rotation of the bundle arm. The bundle arm moves in the outside of the sub scan direction and releases the paper [3] when the bundle clip holds the paper at the folding side. II Composition/Operation
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
15ant2c043na
[1] [2]
Paper catch Conveyance
[3] [4]
Paper release Bundle arm
2-57
SADDLE STITCHING SECTION A. Bundle arm movement mechanism
The bundle arm [5] driven by the bundle arm motor (M10) [6] to catch/release the paper [4] in the sub scan direction via the belt. The bundle arm home sensor (PS32) [1] detects the home position of the bundle arm.
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1] [2] [3] Bundle arm home sensor (PS32) Front side direction Guide shaft [4] [5] [6] Paper Bundle arm Bundle arm motor (M10)
15ant2c044na
2-58
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 B. Bundle arm rotation mechanism
The bundle arm rotation motor (M22) [2] drives the bundle arm [8] via the belt, slide guide [5], and guide shaft [6]. When M22 drives the slide guide [5] in the main scan direction, the guide shaft [6] passing through the long hole of the slide guide is rotated, and then the bundle arm [8] is rotated around the fulcrum. When it is driven to the paper [3] side, M22 stops where the ring [7] is contacted with the guide plate [4]. The bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31) [9] detects the home position of the bundle arm.
[9]
[5] [1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[1] [4]
[7]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Front side direction
[6]
[6] [7] [8] [9]
[5]
Guide shaft Ring Bundle arm
15ant2c045na
Bundle arm rotation motor (M22) Paper Guide plate Slide guide
Bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31)
2-59
[6]
In the rotation drive of the bundle arm [8], the slide guide [5] has to be overrun to be sure to make the ring [7] of the bundle arm contact with the guide plate [6]. To prevent any parts from damage due to the overrun, the guide shaft [3] can be moved by the shock absorbing guide [4] and the spring [2].
[8]
[7]
[1]
[2] [6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
15ant2c046na
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Front side direction Spring Guide shaft Shock absorbing guide
[5] [6] [7] [8]
Slide guide Guide plate Ring Bundle arm
2-60
C. Bundle arm control The bundle arm motor (M10) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON and moves the bundle arm to the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size. The bundle arm rotation motor (M22) rotates in the forward direction to rotate the bundle arm to the stapling section [3] after a specified period of time since the folding sensor /2 (PS44) detects the trailing edge of paper of the last set. It stops the bundle arm in an upright position [4] when the bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31) turns OFF. Then, M22 rotates again [5] to drive the bundle arm until it is contacted with the guide plate on the stapling section [6]. The timing for M22 to restart the rotation [5] is different between in the multi center folding mode and in the saddle stitching mode. Multi center folding mode: When the saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27) detects the saddle stitching hold /Up has been moved to the its upper position. Saddle stitching mode: After a specified period of time since the clincher up down home sensor (PS26) detects that the clinchers are contacted with the staplers. M10 inserts the tip of the bundle arm under the fold line of the paper [7] when the bundle arm assist motor (M26) starts the assisting operation by pushing up the trailing edge of paper at the back side and M10 stops after a specified period of time [8]. M22 rotates in the reverse direction to convey the paper to the bundle clip section when M10 stops [8]. It stops after a specified period of time since PS31 turns ON. M10 rotates in the forward direction to pull out the bundle arm from the paper and take shelter it from the conveyance path [11] after a specified period of time since the bundle clip starts to catch the paper [10]. M10 stops when the bundle arm home sensor (PS32) turns ON [12]. M10 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the bundle arm to its standby position [13] for the subsequent set after a specified period of time since it stops.
[14]
Folding sensor /2 (PS44) Bundle arm assist motor (M26) Clincher up down home sensor (PS26) Bundle arm motor (M10) Bundle arm rotation motor (M22) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
[9]
[11] [12][13]
Bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31) Bundle arm home sensor (PS32) Bundle clip motor (M11) Forward Reverse
[1][2]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Main body start signal
[3]
[4] [5]
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
[6][7] [8]
[10]
15ant2c093na
Insertion completed and conveyance started Conveyance completed Paper clip caught paper Bundle arm shelter operation Shelter completed Bundle arm moved for the subsequent set Time chart of the saddle stitching mode
Bundle arm moved in accordance with the paper size Bundle arm started to rotate Bundle arm stopped in an upright position Bundle arm restarted to rotate Bundle arm contacted with the guide plate Bundle arm inserted under the fold line
2-61
SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 4.3.7 Bundle arm assist control
A. Mechanism The bundle arm assist mechanism is the mechanism to assist the paper conveyance of the bundle arm rotation drive to be conducted without fault. It pushes up the fore edge side of the paper [6] with the bundle arm assist plate [4] to tilt it to the front. The bundle arm assist motor (M26) [2] drives the bundle arm plate [4] via the belt. The bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) [1] detects the upper home position and the bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38) [3] detects the lower home position. The bundle arm assist plate [4] waits at the position 5 mm below the fore edge side of the paper during standby. II Composition/Operation To keep the error to a minimum, the small size paper (313 mm or less) and the large size paper (314 mm or more) are moved to the standby position from the position of PS39 and PS38 respectively since the standby position for the paper is positioned by the driving time of M26 (DC brush motor). In the bundle arm assist operation, the fore edge side of the paper is pushed up 35 mm (or until PS39 turns ON).
[6]
[1]
[2] [5]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c065na
[1] [2] [3]
Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) Bundle arm assist motor (M26) Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38)
[4] [5] [6]
Bundle arm assist plate Front side direction Paper
2-62
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 B. Control (1) Small size paper (313 mm or less)
For the small size paper, the bundle arm assist motor (M26) rotates in the forward direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON to drive the bundle arm assist plate at the home position to the position at the bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) [2]. After a specified period of time, M26 rotates in the reverse direction to drive the bundle arm assist plate from the upper limit position to the standby position in accordance with the paper size [3] and stands by for the paper. Then, M26 rotates in the forward direction to push up the fore edge side of the paper [6] for assisting the bundle arm to be inserted under the fold line of the paper. The operation timing [6] of M26 is different between in the multi center folding mode and in the saddle stitching mode. Multi center folding mode: When the bundle arm is contacted with the guide plate of the stapler section [4] by the bundle arm rotation motor (M22). Saddle stitching mode: When the clincher moves downward [5] at the end of the stapling operation. M26 rotates in the forward direction to assist the bundle arm to convey the paper [7] after a specified period. Then the bundle arm assist plate is go back to the standby position and stands by for the subsequent set [8]. II Composition/Operation
[2]
Bundle arm assist motor (M26) Forward Reverse
[3]
[9]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38) Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) Clincher up down motor (M20) Bundle arm rotation motor (M22) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
[1]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Main body start signal Movement to the upper limit Bundle arm moved in accordance with the paper size Bundle arm contacted with the guide plate Clincher moved down
[4]
[6] [7] [8] [9]
[5]
15ant2c095na
Assist of the insertion of the bundle arm Assist of the bundle arm conveyance Bundle arm moved in accordance with the paper size Time chart of the saddle stitching mode
2-63
SADDLE STITCHING SECTION (2) Large size paper (314 mm or more)
For the large size paper, the bundle arm assist motor (M26) rotates in the forward direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON to drive the bundle arm assist plate to the standby position in accordance with the paper size [2] and stands by for the paper. The subsequent operation is conducted in the same manner as for the small size paper.
[2]
Bundle arm assist Forward motor (M26) Reverse Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38) Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) Clincher up down motor (M20) Bundle arm rotation motor (M22) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
[8]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[1]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Main body start signal Bundle arm moved in accordance with the paper size Bundle arm contacted with the guide plate Clincher moved down
[3]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[4]
15ant2c096na
Assist of the insertion of the bundle arm Assist of the bundle arm conveyance Bundle arm moved in accordance with the paper size Time chart of the saddle stitching mode
2-64
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 4.3.8 Bundle clip control
A. Mechanism The bundle clip is the mechanism to hold the paper that the bundle arm conveyed to the slope and convey the paper to the bundle press stage with its fore edge side to the trimmer section. The bundle clip catches, releases, and conveys the paper. It catches the paper at the upper limit position [1], conveys it [2], and then release it at the lower limit position [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] [2] Catching Conveying [3] Releasing
15ant2c047na
2-65
The bundle clip motor (M11) [5] drives the bundle clip [1] up [8] and down [7] via the gear and belt. The spring [9] provides the bundle clip the force to catch the paper, and the wire [2] and the winding shaft [3] open the bundle clip to release the paper. The upper limit of the bundle clip is detected by the bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) [4] and the lower limit is detected by the bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30) [6].
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Bundle clip Wire Winding shaft Bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) Bundle clip motor (M11) [6] [7] [8] [9]
[5]
15ant2c048na
Bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30) Down Up Spring
2-66
The bundle clip is closed all the time except when it is located at the upper and lower limit position. When the bundle clip moves up [1], the release roller /Up [6] gets onto [7] the release plate /Up [8]. Then the wire winding shaft [4] rotates [3] and takes up the wire [5] to open the bundle clip. In the same way, when the bundle clip moves down [2], the release roller /Lw [10] gets onto [12] the release plate /Lw [11] and then the wire winding shaft [4] rotates [9] and takes up the wire [5] to open the bundle clip.
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[10]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[12]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Up Down
[11]
[10]
[4]
[9]
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] Getting over at up Release plate /Up Wire winding rotation Release roller /Lw Release plate /Lw Getting over at down
15ant2c049na
Wire winding rotation Wire winding shaft Wire Release roller /Up
2-67
SADDLE STITCHING SECTION B. Control
The bundle clip motor (M11) rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle clip until the bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) turns ON [2] after a specified period of time since the bundle assist motor (M26) starts the assisting operation [1]. Then, the bundle clip stops with its clip opened. The bundle arm conveys the paper from the stapling section to the bundle clip section, and then the bundle arm rotation motor (M22) stops [3]. After a specified period of time, M11 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle clip and close the bundle clip to catch the paper, and then M11 stops after a specified period of time [4] When the bundle arm motor (M10) completes the shelter operation [5], M11 rotates in the reverse direction to II Composition/Operation move down the bundle clip [6]. The bundle clip opens the clip to release the paper [7] and M11 stops when the bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30) turns ON. M11 rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle clip after a specified period of time since M11 stops. Then, M11 stops to move the bundle clip at the standby position for the subsequent set after a specified period of time since PS30 turns OFF [8].
[3]
Bundle arm motor (M10) Bundle arm rotation motor (M22) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
[5]
[8]
Bundle arm assist motor (M26) Bundle clip motor (M11) Forward Reverse
Bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) Bundle clip lower limit motor (PS30)
[1]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Assisting operation by the bundle arm Bundle clip opened Paper conveyance by the bundle arm completed Paper caught
[2]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[4]
[6] [7]
15ant2c099na
Bundle arm shelter operation Conveyed by the bundle clip Paper released Returned to the standby position for the subsequent set
2-68
BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION
5. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION

5.1 Composition
[9] [10] [1]
15ant2c050na
[8]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Item Registration method /1 Bundle exit conveyance method Trimmer scraps storage method Trimmer scraps press method Trimmer scraps full detection method Trimmer scraps removal method Registration method /2 Press stage up down method Bundle press method
[4]
Specification/mechanism Belt with claw
Bundle exit tray paper full detection method Photo sensor Conveyance belt + extendable tray (2 step) Drawer + storage detection sensor Press plate Photo sensor Fan exhaust Registration plate Wire Spring + wire
2-69
5.2
5.2.1
Drive
Bundle press stage up down drive
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[1]
[9]
[2]
[8] [7]
[3] [6] [4] [5]

15ant2c051na
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Bundle registration plate Bundle registration plate wire Up down wire Bundle press stage Front side direction Bundle exit auxiliary roller Knob
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]
Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) Bundle press stage up down motor (M24) Over-winding-prevention stopper Wire winding shaft Bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16)
2-70
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 5.2.2 Bundle press movement drive
[1]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] Bundle press
[4]
[3]
[4] [5] Left side view
[2]
15ant2c052na
Bundle press movement home sensor (PS36) Bundle press stage
Bundle press movement motor (M17)
5.2.3
Bundle registration drive
[1] [6]
[5]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] Exit claw Left side view Bundle press stage
[3]
[4] [5] [6]
[2]
Registration press claw
15ant2c053na
Bundle registration home sensor (PS34) Bundle registration motor (M12)
2-71
BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION 5.2.4 Bundle press drive
[9]
[1]
[8]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[6]
15ant2c054na
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Press plate Release wire /Rt Wire winding shaft Bundle press motor (M23) Release wire /Lt
[6] [7] [8] [9]
Front side direction Bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47) Bundle press home sensor (PS37) Spring
2-72
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 5.2.5 Bundle exit drive
[12]
[1]
[11]
[10]
[9] [8] [2] [7]

Bundle exit conveyance belt Left side view Bundle exit drive belt Trimmer scraps press claw Belt Bundle exit motor (M5) [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[3]
15ant2c055na
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
One-way clutch (for the bundle exit conveyance belt) Trimmer scraps press plate Pin (homeward) Scraps press home sensor (PS48) Pin (outward) One-way clutch (for pressing the trimmer scraps)
2-73
5.3
5.3.1 method.
Operation
Bundle press stage up down control
The bundle press stage conducts the up and down operation to convey and exit the paper by the switch back The bundle press stage is moved up [7] to decrease the angle difference when receiving the paper [8] conveyed by the bundle clip from the slope [1]. The bundle press stage exits the paper [5] to the bundle exit tray at the horizontal position [4] at the paper exit. The bundle registration plate [6] and the bundle exit auxiliary roller [3] move up and down together with the up II Composition/Operation and down operation of the bundle press stage.
[7]
[8]
[1] [2]
[3]
[6]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Slope Front side direction Bundle exit auxiliary roller
[5]
[4]
[5] [6] [7] [8] Paper path at the paper exit Bundle registration plate
15ant2c057na
Bundle press stage (upper position) Paper path to the bundle press stage
Bundle press stage (horizontal position)
The registration claw [3] pushes in the paper to make sure that the paper is conveyed to the bundle press stage when the bundle press stage [4] receives the paper from the bundle clip [6].
[5]
[6] [1]
[2]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] Slope Front side direction Registration claw
[3]
[4] [5] [6] Bundle press stage Paper conveyance Bundle clip
15ant2c061na
2-74
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 A. Mechanism
The bundle press stage up down motor (M24) [12] rotates the wire winding shaft [14] and winds up the up down wire [3]. During the initial phase, the wire is tightened and the wire arm [4] comes to the horizontal position but the bundle press stage [5] doesn't move up. At the time, as the wire arm comes horizontal, the up down wire is loosen and the bundle registration plate [1] moves down and works as the stopper against the registration operation. Then, the bundle press stage moves up as the wire winding shaft [14] rotates and winds up the up down wire [3] and it stops when the bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) [11] turns ON. The home positions (shelter position) for the bundle registration plate and the bundle press stage are detected by the bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16) [15] and the bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) [10] respectively. The over-winding-prevention stopper [13] prevents the over winding since you can move up and down the bundle press stage manually by rotating the knob [9]. II Composition/Operation
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[1]
[11]
[2]
[10] [9] [3]
[4]
[5] [7] [8]
[6]
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] Knob
15ant2c056na
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
Bundle registration plate Bundle registration plate wire Up down wire Wire arm Bundle press stage Bundle exit auxiliary roller arm Front side direction Bundle exit auxiliary roller
Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) Bundle press stage up down motor (M24) Over-winding-prevention stopper Wire winding shaft Bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16)
2-75
BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION B. Control (1) Trimming mode
The bundle press stage up down motor (M24) rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle press stage [2] when the main body start signal [1] turns ON. M24 stops while holding the bundle press stage in slanting position when the bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) turns ON [3]. M24 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle press stage [5] after the bundle clip releases the paper, the bundle registration motor (M12) assists the paper conveyance operation, and the bundle press movement motor (M17) conveys the paper to the paper conveyance position [4]. M24 stops when the bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) turns ON [6]. II Composition/Operation M24 starts to rotate in the forward direction and moves up the bundle registration plate [8] to open the paper path to the trimmer section when the bundle press motor (M23) completes the paper press operation after the registration operation. M24 moves up the bundle press stage [10] for the subsequent set when M12 completes the paper exit [9].
[7]
Bundle press movement motor (M17) Bundle press motor (M23) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
[9]
Bundle registra- Forward tion motor Reverse (M12) Bundle press stage up down motor (M24) Forward Reverse
Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35)

Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) Bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16)
[1] [2] [3]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Main body start signal Bundle press stage moved up Stopped at the upper limit
[4][5][6]
[7] [8] [9] [10]
[8]
Paper press completed
[10]
15ant2c100na
Bundle registration plate moved up Paper exit completed Bundle press stage moved up * Only for the paper of 297 mm or more (before folding)
Paper conveyance assisting operation completed Bundle press stage moved down Returning to the home position
2-76
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 (2) No trimming mode
The bundle press stage up down motor (M24) rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle press stage [2] when the main body start signal [1] turns ON. M24 stops while holding the bundle press stage in slanting position when the bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) turns ON [3]. M24 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle press stage [5] after the bundle clip releases the paper, the bundle registration motor (M12) assists the paper conveyance operation, and the bundle press movement motor (M17) conveys the paper to the paper conveyance position [4]. M24 stops when the bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) turns ON [6]. M24 moves up the bundle press stage [8] for the subsequent set when M12 completes the paper exit [7]. II Composition/Operation
15ant2c101na
[7]
Bundle registra- Forward tion motor (M12) Reverse Bundle press stage up down motor (M24) Forward Reverse
Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) Bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16)
[1] [2] [3]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Main body start signal Bundle press stage moved up Stopped at the upper limit
[4][5][6]
[6] [7] [8]
[8]
Returning to the home position Paper exit completed Bundle press stage moved up
Paper conveyance assisting operation completed Bundle press stage moved down * Only for the paper of 297 mm or more (before folding)
2-77
BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION 5.3.2 Bundle press movement control
The bundle press movement is the mechanism to convey the paper to the trimmer section by pressing the paper with the press section to prevent the trimming skew at the trimmer operation after the paper registration operation. A. Mechanism The bundle press movement motor (M17) drives the bundle press section [9] in the main scan direction. When receiving the paper with the bundle press stage [2], the bundle press section [9] moves 100 mm backward from the home position to obtain the paper conveyance path. II Composition/Operation When conducting the bundle registration operation, the bundle press section moves to the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size. The bundle press movement home sensor (PS36) [3] detects the home position of the bundle press section. When the bundle press section moves to the home position, the metal plate [7] gets down the actuator [6] for the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) [8] and obtains the paper conveyance path. The bundle sensor /4 (PS54) [10] is for the paper jam detection.
[9] [8]
[8]
[10]
[1]
[6] [7] [6]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Actuator Bundle press stage Bundle press movement home sensor (PS36) Actuator Front side direction [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[5] [2]
15ant2c058na
[4]
Actuator Metal plate
[3]
Trimmer registration sensor (PS55) Bundle press section Bundle sensor /4 (PS54)
2-78
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 B. Control (1) Trimming mode
The bundle press movement motor (M17) rotates in the reverse direction to move the bundle press section to the paper conveyance position [2] after specified period of time since the bundle clip motor (M11) starts conveying the paper [1]. Then M17 rotates in the forward direction to move the bundle press section to the appropriate press standby position in accordance with the paper size [3]. M17 rotates in the reverse direction and searches for the press position [6] for the paper when the bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) detects that the bundle press stage has been moved down [5]. M17 stops the bundle press section at the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size [7] after a specified period of time since the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) turns OFF. M17 searches the home position [8] and then moves the bundle press section to the paper trimming position [9] after a specified period of time since the bundle press motor (M23) completes the paper press operation. The bundle press section is returned to the home position [10] after a specified period of time since the trimming operation is completed. II Composition/Operation
[1]
Bundle clip motor (M11) Bundle press movement motor (M17) Bundle press motor (M23) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
[2] [3] [4][6] [7]
[8] [9]
[10]
Bundle press movement home sensor (PS36)
Trimmer registration sensor (PS55) Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) Trimmer blade motor (M31)
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Conveyed by the bundle clip Moved to the paper conveyance position Moved to the press standby position Home position detected Bundle press stage moved down Searching the press position [7] [8] [9] [10] Stopped at the press position Searching the home position Moved to the trimming position Returning to the home position
15ant2c102na
* Only for the paper of 297 mm or more (before folding)
2-79
BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION (2) No trimming mode
The bundle press movement motor (M17) rotates in the reverse direction to move the bundle press section to the paper conveyance position [2] after a specified period of time since the bundle clip motor (M11) starts conveying the paper [1]. Then M17 rotates in the forward direction to move the bundle press section to the appropriate press position in accordance with the paper size [3]. M17 rotates in the forward direction to return the bundle press section to the home position [5] when the bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) detects that the bundle press stage has been moved down [4].
[1]
Bundle clip motor (M11) Bundle press movement motor (M17) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
[2]
[3]
[5]
Bundle press movement home sensor (PS36)
Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35)
[4]
[1] [2] [3] Conveyed by the bundle clip Moved to the shelter position Moved to the press position [4] [5]
15ant2c103na
Bundle press stage up down home position Returning to the home position * Only for the paper of 297 mm or more (before folding)
2-80
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 5.3.3 Bundle press control
The bundle press is the mechanism to hold the paper during trim operation to prevent the trimming skew after the paper registration operation. A. Mechanism The bundle press plates /Up [1] and /Lw [15] hold the paper. The bundle press plate /Up is pulled to the bundle press plate /Lw [15] (to the direction to hold and press the paper) by the spring [13] via the press wires /Rt [2] and /Lt [12]. The bundle press plate /UP [1] moves down by the spring [13] when the wire winding shaft [4] is rotated by the bundle press motor (M23) [5] and the release wires /Rt [3] and /Lt [6] are released. The force of When M23 keeps rotating, the press wire /Lt [6] is loosen and the bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47) [8] turns OFF by the actuator [9] due to the spring [10], and then the paper press position is detected. The wire winding shaft [4] winds the release wires /Rt [3] and /Lt [6] to move up the bundle press plate /Up [1] for releasing the press on the paper [16] when M23 rotates in reverse. The bundle press home sensor (PS37) [11] detects the home position of the bundle press plate /Up [1]. II Composition/Operation the spring presses the paper.
[12]
[13]
[1] [11]
[10] [2] [6] [3] [8] [16] [7] [5] [4]
[9]
[14]
[15]
15ant2c059na
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
Bundle press plate /Up Press wire /Rt Release wire /Rt Wire winding shaft Bundle press motor (M23) Release wire /Lt Front side direction Bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47)
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
Actuator Spring Bundle press home sensor (PS37) Press wire /Lt Spring Bundle press plate /Up (down) Bundle press plate /Lw Bundle press plate /Up (up)
2-81
BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION B. Control
The bundle press motor (M23) rotates in the forward direction to conduct the paper press operation [2] to press the paper properly when the bundle press movement motor (M17) completes the press position search [1]. M23 rotates in the reverse direction to move up the bundle press plate /Up slightly to prevent the paper from becoming loose [4] when the bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47) detects the lower limit [3] and turns OFF. M23 rotates in the forward direction to press the paper [5] after a specified period of time since the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) detects the completion of the registration operation. M23 rotates in the reverse direction to return the bundle press plate /Up to the home position [7] when the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes the paper trimming operation [6]. II Composition/Operation
[1][2]
[5]
[7]
Trimmer registration sensor (PS55) Bundle press home sensor (PS37)
Bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47) Trimmer blade motor (M31)
[3][4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Searching the press position completed Press operation Lower limit detected Press release [5] [6] [7] Press
[6]
15ant2c105na
Trimming completed Returning to the home position
2-82
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 5.3.4 Bundle registration control
The paper registration operation reforms the skew at trimming. A. Mechanism The bundle registration motor (M12) drives the registration claws [4]. Two registration claws [4] conduct the registration by making the paper [14] contact [3] with the bundle registration plate [13] from the gutter side. In the registration operation, the bundle press section [7] conducts the pressing by moving to the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size. To conduct the bundle registration, the registration claws [4] press the paper until the actuator [2] on the bundle press section comes in the upright position and the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) [1] turns ON. The bundle exit claws [9] are located at the 180 opposite to the registration claws on the belt. M12 rotates in the reverse direction [10] to exit the paper at the paper exit. The home position of the registration claws [4] is detected when the registration claws push the actuator [11] and turns ON the bundle registration home sensor (PS34) [12]. II Composition/Operation
[14]
[1]
[2]
[13] [3] [4]
[12] [11]
[10]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[9]
[8]
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
[7]
[6]
[5]
15ant2c060na
Trimmer registration sensor (PS55) Actuator Registration direction Registration claws Left side view Bundle sensor /2 (PS15) Bundle press section
Bundle sensor /4 (PS54) Bundle exit claws Drive direction of the bundle exit tabs Actuator Bundle registration home sensor (PS34) Bundle registration plate Paper
2-83
BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION B. Control
The bundle registration motor (M12) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal turns ON and the registration claws move to the standby position in accordance with the paper size [2]. The bundle registration motor (M12) rotates in the reverse direction to conduct the paper conveyance assisting operation [4] and the preregistration operation [5] after a specified period of time since the bundle clip motor (M11) starts conveying the paper [3]. Then M12 stops when the registration claws reach at the specified position. M12 rotates in the reverse direction and conducts the registration operation [7] with the registration claws when the bundle press motor (M23) completes the press releasing operation [6]. The registration claws stop when the II Composition/Operation trimmer registration sensor (PS55) turns ON [8]. M12 rotates in the forward direction to move the registration claws to the specified shelter position [10] when M23 completes the press operation [9]. M12 rotates in the forward direction to let the bundle exit claws push the paper to conduct the paper exit operation [12] after a specified period of time since the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes the trimming operation [11]. M12 stops when the bundle registration home sensor (PS34) turns ON [13]. M12 rotates in the reverse direction to move the bundle exit claws to the standby position [14] after a specified period of time. Then it stands by for the subsequent set.
[2]
Bundle clip motor (M11) Bundle press motor (M23) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[9][10]
[12]
[14]
Bundle registra- Forward tion motor Reverse (M12)

Trimmer registration sensor (PS55)
Trimmer blade motor (M31)

Bundle registration home sensor (PS34)
[1]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Main body start signal Moved to the standby position Conveyance by the bundle clip started Paper conveyance assisted Pre-registration Press release Registration [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
[7] [8]
[11]
[13]
15ant2c106 na
Registration operation completed Paper press completed Shelter operation Trimming completed Paper exit operation Home position detected Moved to the standby position
2-84
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 5.3.5 Bundle exit control
A. Mechanism (1) Bundle exit mechanism The paper is exited to the bundle exit tray [12]. The paper exited to the bundle exit tray is conveyed to the front by the bundle exit conveyance belt [1] and stacked. The bundle exit motor (M5) [5] drives the bundle exit conveyance belt [1] via the bundle exit drive belt [4] and the bundle exit belt drive shaft [3]. M5 drives the bundle exit conveyance belt for a specified period of time to convey the paper to the front [13] for every paper exit. The bundle exit tray is expandable. The bundle tray set sensor (PS58) [9] detects whether the bundle exit tray is stored or not. M5 also drives the scrap press plate [11]. In each drive path from M5 to the bundle exit drive belt and the scraps press plate, there is a one-way clutch respectively that switches the rotational direction of M5. Therefore, the bundle exit drive and the scraps press plate are not driven simultaneously. II Composition/Operation
[12]
[13]
[1] [2] [11]
[10]
[3]
[4] [9]
[5]
[8] [6] [7]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Bundle exit conveyance belt Bundle exit auxiliary roller Bundle exit belt drive shaft Bundle exit drive belt Bundle exit motor (M5) Scraps press home sensor (PS48) Scraps box set sensor (PS40) [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] Scrap press claws Bundle tray set sensor (PS58) Trimmer scraps full sensor (PS41) Scraps press plate Bundle exit tray Front side direction
15ant2c062na
2-85
BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION (2) Bundle exit tray expanding mechanism
The bundle exit tray is expandable. The folded bundle exit conveyance belt [6] is also expanded [1] when the bundle exit tray is expanded. At the time, it also moves the bundle exit conveyance belt drive shaft [5] for the bundle exit conveyance belt [1] and [6].
[5] [6]
[4] [3] [1]
[2]
15ant2c063na
[1] [2] [3]
Bundle exit conveyance belt (expanded) Folding stand Drive shaft
[4] [5] [6]
Bundle exit drive belt Bundle exit conveyance belt drive shaft Bundle exit conveyance belt (folded)
2-86
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 (3) Trimmer scraps press mechanism
In the trimmer scraps press, the bundle exit motor (M5) drives the outward pin [10] via the press claws [9] to move the scraps press plate [5] to the front and press the trimmer scraps. When the belt [6] rotates and the scraps press claws [9] pass the maximum movement position [12], the scraps press claws comes off the pin [10] for the onward route and the scraps press plate returns to the home position [5] by the return auxiliary spring [11]. When it is not brought back to the home position by the return auxiliary spring [11], the scraps press claws drive the pin [2] for the homeward route. The distance from the maximum movement position [12] to the home position [5] is 200 mm. The scraps press home sensor (PS48) [8] detects the home position of the scraps press claws [9]. II Composition/Operation
[10]
[11]
[12]
[9]
[8] [1] [7]
[6]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Front side direction Homeward pin Scraps box Left side view Scraps press plate (home position) Belt
[4]
[3]
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] Drive shaft
[2]
15ant2c064na
Scraps press home sensor (PS48) Scrap press claws Outward pin Return auxiliary spring Scraps press plate (maximum movement position)
2-87
BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION B. Trimmer scraps removal control
The scraps removal fan (FM1) [3] blows air [4] to make sure to put the trimmer scraps to the scraps box.
[5]
[6]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] Left side view
[3]
[4] [5] [6]
[2]
Air Bundle press Bundle clip
[1]
15ant2c115na
Bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30) Trimmer scraps removal fan (FM1)
The trimmer scraps removal fan (FM1) operates only in the trimmer mode. When the main body start signal [1] turns ON, FM1 is rotated and the bundle clip releases [2] the paper, FM1 stops for a time to prevent the paper from having the uneven edge. When the bundle press motor (M23) completes the paper press [3], FM1 is rotated again to send air so that sheet trimming scraps get in the scraps box without fail.
Bundle press motor (M23)
Forward Reverse
Trimmer scraps removal fan (FM1) Bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30)
[1]
[1] [2] Main body start signal Bundle clip released the paper
[2]
[3]
[3]
15ant2c116na
Paper press operation completed
2-88
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 C. Bundle exit control
The bundle exit motor (M5) rotates in the forward direction and the bundle exit conveyance belt conveys the exit paper [2] after a specified period of time since the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes the trimming [1]. M5 stops after a specified period of time since the bundle exit sensor /2 (PS57) detects the trailing edge of paper[3].
[2]
Bundle exit motor (M5) Forward Reverse II Composition/Operation
Trimmer blade motor (M31) Bundle exit sensor /2 (PS57)
[1]
[1] [2] Trimming completed Bundle exit conveyance [3]
[3]
Trailing edge of paper detected
15ant2c107na
[1]
[1] Bundle exit sensor /2 (PS57)
15ant2c114na
2-89
BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION D. Trimmer scraps press control
The bundle exit motor (M5) rotates in the reverse direction to conduct the paper press operation [2] after a specified period of time since the bundle exit motor (M5) completes the paper exit and M5 stops [1]. Then, M5 stops when the belt goes around and the scraps press home sensor (PS48) detects the home position [3]. The trimmer scraps press control is conducted either every 5 trimming operation or after exiting a print for which total of more than 60 sheets of paper is trimmed, whichever comes first.
[1]
Bundle exit motor (M5) Forward Reverse
[2]
Scraps press home sensor (PS48)
[3]
[1] [2] Bundle exit conveyance completed Paper press operation [3] Home position detected
15ant2c108na
E. Bundle exit paper full control The bundle tray paper full sensor (PS61) [1] detects the bundle exit paper full. The main body displays the message on its operation panel when the paper full is detected.
[1]
[1] Bundle tray paper full sensor (PS61)
15ant2c109na
F.
Trimmer scraps full control
The trimmer scraps full sensor (PS41) detects the paper scraps full of the scraps box. The main body displays the message on its operation panel when the paper scraps full is detected. G. Trimmer scraps tray set detection The scraps box set sensor (PS40) detects whether the scraps box is set or not. The main body displays the message on its operation panel when the scraps box is not set.
2-90
TRIMMER SECTION
6. TRIMMER SECTION
6.1 Composition
[1]
[2]
15ant2c066na
Symbol [1] [2]
Item Trimming method Trimmer board movement method
Specification/mechanism Blade + board method/Fore-edge trimming Solenoid + one-way clutch
2-91
TRIMMER SECTION
6.2
6.2.1
Drive
Trimmer press drive
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[5] [6] [7] [8] Press drive screw
15ant2c067na
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Trimmer board Press arm Trimmer press motor (M32) Slide block
Trimmer press home sensor (PS53) Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) Trimmer press plate
2-92
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 6.2.2 Trimmer blade drive
TRIMMER SECTION
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Trimmer blade drive screw Drive plate Drive guide holes Drive shafts
[3]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[2]
Trimmer blade
[1]
15ant2c068na
Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) Trimmer blade motor (M31)
2-93
TRIMMER SECTION 6.2.3 Trimmer board drive
[1]
[2]
[6] [7] [5] [4]

[5] [6] [7]
[3]
Trimmer board One-way clutch Front side direction
15ant2c069na
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Trimmer board solenoid (SD11) Trimmer board replacement sensor (PS59) Pinion Rack
2-94
TRIMMER SECTION
6.3
6.3.1
Operation
Trimmer press control
A. Mechanism The trimmer press is the mechanism to hold the paper at its fore-edge side to prevent the trimming misalignment. There is approximately 5 mm of opening at the home position. The press arms [4] press the paper with the trimmer board [2] when the trimmer press motor (M32) [1] drives and the slide blocks [7] move to the closing direction [8]. M32 detects the completion of the paper press via overcurrent. M32 rotates in the reverse direction to widen the opening to approximately 20 mm before conveying the paper to the trimmer section if the number of the print paper is 16 or more (32 or more for the saddle stitched paper). The trimmer press home sensor (PS53) [6] and the trimmer press home sensor (PS52) [5] detect the home position and 20 mm of opening respectively. II Composition/Operation
[6] [5]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Trimmer press motor (M32) Trimmer board Front side direction Press arms
[3]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[2]
15ant2c070na
Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) Trimmer press home sensor (PS53) Slide blocks Press direction
2-95
TRIMMER SECTION
When changing the trimming position of the trimmer board or replacing the trimmer board via the I/O check mode, M32 rotates in the reverse direction to move up the press board higher than the position of the trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) and release the trimmer board [3] by pushing the trimmer board retaining spring [2] by the plate [1]. At the time, the opening is approximately 23 mm. The position is detected via overcurrent.
[3]
[1] [2] Plate Trimmer board retaining spring [3]
[2]
Trimmer board
[1]
15ant2c071na
2-96
TRIMMER SECTION
(1) The number of the print paper is 16 or more (32 or more for the saddle stitched paper) The trimmer press motor (M32) rotates in the reverse direction [2] when the bundle clip motor starts conveying the paper [1]. When the trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) [3] detects upper limit position of the trimmer board, M32 is stopped and waits for the paper. At this time, the opening is approximately 20 mm. M32 rotates in the forward direction to press the paper when the paper is conveyed to the opening by the bundle press movement motor (M17) [4]. M32 stops when the overcurrent is detected [5]. The returning operation to the home position [7] is conducted when the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes the trimming [6]. II Composition/Operation
[1]
Bundle clip motor (M11) Bundle press movement motor (M17) Trimmer press motor (M32) Trimmer blade motor (M31) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
[2]
[4]
[5]
Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)
Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
[3]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Conveyance by the bundle clip started Opening operation Stopped when the opening is approx. 20 mm Conveyance of the trimmed paper completed [5] [6] [7]
[6]
[7]
15ant2c110na
Trimmer press completed Trimming completed Returning operation to the home position
(2) The number of the print paper is 15 (30 for the saddle stitched paper) M32 rotates in the forward direction to press the paper without widening the opening when the paper is conveyed to the opening [4].
2-97
TRIMMER SECTION
(3) The number of the print paper is 15 or less (30 or less for the saddle stitched paper) The trimmer press motor (M32) rotates in the forward direction [2] when the bundle clip motor starts conveying the paper [1]. M32 is stopped and the opening is narrowed after a specified period of time in accordance with the number of paper, and then it stands by for the paper. M32 rotates in the forward direction to press the paper when the paper is conveyed to the opening by the bundle press movement motor (M17) [3]. M32 stops when the overcurrent is detected [4]. The returning operation to the home position [6] is conducted when the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes the trimming [5]. II Composition/Operation
[1]
Bundle clip motor (M11) Bundle press movement motor (M17) Trimmer press motor (M32) Trimmer blade motor (M31) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1] [2] [3] Conveyance by the bundle clip started Narrowing operation M17 completed the paper conveyance [4] [5] [6]
[5]
[6]
15ant2c111na
Trimmer press completed Trimming completed Returning operation to the home position
2-98
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 6.3.2 Trimmer blade control
TRIMMER SECTION
A. Mechanism The trimming is conducted by the trimmer blade driven by the trimmer blade motor (M31) while the paper is pressed by the trimmer press. The drive shafts [4] moves up in a slanting direction along with the drive guide holes [2] when M31 pulls the trimmer blade retaining plate [5] to the direction [1]. It trims the paper with the trimmer blade [6] attached on the trimmer blade retaining plate [5]. The completion of the trimming is detected by the overcurrent of M31 caused when the trimmer blade retaining plate [5] is contacted with the trimmer stoppers [7] attached to the trimmer press plate. If the overcurrent of M31 is not detected even if the trimmer blade keeps moving up, the trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) detects the upper limit. II Composition/Operation
[7]
[5]
[6]
[1] [5]
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Trimming direction Drive guide holes Front side direction Drive shafts
[2]
[5] [6] [7] Trimmer blade retaining plate Trimmer blade Trimmer stoppers
15ant2c072na
2-99
TRIMMER SECTION B. Control
The trimmer blade motor (M31) starts the trimming [2] when the trimmer press motor (M32) completes the press and stops [1]. M31 stops when the overcurrent is detected [3]. M31 starts the returning operation to the home position [5] when the bundle press motor (M23) starts releasing the press [4]. M31 stops when the trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) turns ON [6].
[1]
Bundle press motor (M23) Trimmer press motor (M32) Trimmer blade motor (M31) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
[4]
Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50)
[2]
[1] [2] [3] Trimmer press completed Trimmer operation Stopped by the overcurrent
[3]
[4] [5] [6]
[5]
[6]
15ant2c112na
Releasing the press started Returning operation to the home position Home position detected
2-100
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 6.3.3 Trimmer board control
TRIMMER SECTION
A. Mechanism The trimmer operation may be conducted improperly due to the damage on the trimmer board if the trimmer board is subjected to the trimmer blade many times at the same position. For this reason, the trimmer board is slid 1 mm backward for sheet cutting each time a job of 700 times trimming is completed. The trimmer board solenoid (SD11) [1] slides the trimmer board [5] with its fixing released by the trimmer press motor (M32). The pinion [3] pushes the rack [4] 0.5 mm every time SD11 turns ON. The rotation of the pinion is transmitted to the rack by the one-way clutch [6] and pushes the trimmer board when SD11 turns ON. The pinion does not rotate and push the trimmer board when SD11 turns OFF by the one-way clutch. Each time a job of 700 times trimming is completed, SD11 is turned on twice to move the trimmer board 1 mm. The trimmer board can be slid up to approximately 26 mm. The main body displays the message on its operation panel when the trimmer board replacement sensor (PS59) [2] turns ON. The trimmer operation is prohibited when the trimming is conducted 700 times since PS59 turns ON. NOTE Changing software DIPSW22-5 to 1 in the service mode, the operation timing of the trimmer board solenoid can be selected among 700/500/300 (700 by default) in the user mode adjustment screen. The barr may occur on the trimmed edge of the paper before the movement cycle of the trimmer board depending on the paper type. II Composition/Operation
[1]
[2]
[6] [7] [5] [4]

[4] [5] [6] Rack Trimmer board One-way clutch
[3]
15ant2c073na
[1] [2] [3]
Trimmer board solenoid (SD11) Trimmer board replacement sensor (PS59) Pinion
2-101
TRIMMER SECTION B. Control
The trimmer press motor (M32) starts the returning operation [2] to the home position when the 700th trimmer operation [1] is completed. M32 does not stop by defection of the trimmer press home sensor (PS53) [3]. The opening keeps widening until the overcurrent of M32 is detected [4]. When M32 stops, the trimmer board solenoid (SD11) turns ON and OFF twice [5] to move the trimmer board 1 mm. Then, M32 starts the returning operation to the home position [6].
[4] [5]
II Composition/Operation Trimmer board solenoid (SD11) Trimmer press motor (M32) Trimmer blade motor (M31) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
[6]
[1]
[1] [2] [3] 700th trimmer operation
[2]
[3]
[4] [5] [6] Overcurrent of M32 detected Trimmer board moved 1 mm
15ant2c113na
Opening operation of the trimmer press Home position detected
Returning operation to the home position
2-102
rc501ma.book Page 1 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:38 PM
SERVICE MANUAL
Theory of Operation
RC-501
2005.03 Ver. 1.0
rc501ma.book Page i Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:38 PM
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
OUTLINE
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Capacity:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. UNIT COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
II
1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
1. WASTE TONER CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. WASTE TONER RECYCLE BOX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
rc501ma.book Page ii Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:38 PM
CONTENTS
I Outline
Blank page
ii
I OUTLINE
1.1
Type: I Outline
Type
Toner recycle cut unit Air conveyance waste toner collecting unit
Name:
1.2
Functions
Air conveyance by the diaphragm pump Waste toner recycle box
Toner ejection: Waste toner container:
1.3
Capacity:
Max. 8,000 g
Recycle amount of the untransferred toner: Recycle rate of the untransferred toner: 98% or more
1.4
Maintenance
1.5
Machine data
24V DC (supplied from the main body) 10W or less
Power source:
Maximum power consumption: Dimensions: Weight: Recycle pump: W 70 mm x D 135 mm x H 100 mm Waste toner recycle box: W 200 mm x D 330 mm x H 500 mm Recycle pump: 0.85 kg Waste toner recycle box: 1.2 kg Others: 0.65 kg (hose, recycle pump control board, accumulator)
1.6
1-1
UNIT COMPOSITION
2. UNIT COMPOSITION
I Outline
[1]
[2]
[4]
[1] [2] Accumulator Recycle pump
[3]
[3] [4]
14rtt1c001na
Recycle pump drive board (RCPDB) Waste toner recycle box
1-2
WASTE TONER CONVEYANCE SECTION
1. WASTE TONER CONVEYANCE SECTION
1.1 Composition
[4]
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4]
[3]
Item
[2]
[1]
Specification/mechanism Accumulator Recycle pump + conveyance hose Recycle pump drive board (RCPDB) Recycle pump + conveyance hose
14rtt2c001na
Waste toner backflow prevention method Waste toner suction method Recycle pump drive method Waste toner conveyance method
2-1
1.2
Operation
A. Purpose The surplus of the toner used at the printing is recycled to the developing section by the recycling mechanism. The toner circulating in the devise may slightly deteriorate the print quality because the paper dust adhering to the drum at the transfer/separation is mixed in the cleaning section. To maintain the certain print quality, the toner circulation must be stopped and the fresh toner must be used for development. The recycle cut device makes it possible. II Composition/Operation B. Characteristics As the recycle cut unit discharges the non-transferred toner to the outside before it is returned to the developing unit, only unused toner is kept always in the developing unit. It also makes possible to perform the development with the toner in which no paper dust is mixed so that you can maintain the certain print quality. However, the toner consumption is increased because it ejects the used toner. C. Waste toner conveyance path The waste toner sucked from the toner recycle intake [2] of the toner recycle pipe [1] is conveyed to the accumulator [3] via the accumulator hose [10]. The one-way valves are provided at the outlet and inlet of the accumulator to prevent the backflow of the waste toner. The waste toner passing the accumulator is conveyed to the intake [5] of the recycle pump [8] via the hose joint [9] and the hose /5 [4]. The waste toner in the recycle pump is pressurized by the recycle pump and ejected from the outlet [7] to the hose /6 [6].
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[6]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Toner recycle pipe Toner recycle intake Accumulator Hose /5 Intake
[4]
[5]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[4]
Hose /6 Outlet Recycle pump Hose joint
[3]
[2]
[1]
14rtt2c002na
Accumulator hose
2-2
Hose /6 connected to the hose joint [1] conveys the waste toner to the outside. The toner conveyed to the outside is conveyed and recycled to the waste toner recycle box [3] via the hose /3 [2].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1] [2] Hose joint Hose /3 [3] Waste toner recycle box
14rtt2c003na
D. Operation timing The recycle pump turns ON/OFF in sync with ON/OFF of the drum motor (M2) to perform the waste toner recycle during the drum rotation. The recycle pump is operated only when the software DIPSW12-5 is set to ON.
2-3
WASTE TONER RECYCLE BOX
2. WASTE TONER RECYCLE BOX

2.1 Composition
[1]
[2]
[3]
14rtt2c004na
Symbol [1] [2] [3]
Item Toner/air separation method Waste toner container Toner/air path separation method 1st recycle box 2nd recycle box
Specification/mechanism Filter (bilayer type)
2-4
2.2
Operation
A. Purpose The large amount of air is contained in the recycled waste toner. In the waste toner box, the waste toner and the air is separated to recycle the waste toner only. B. Waste toner/air separation mechanism The waste toner [8] conveyed to the top of the 1st recycle container [4] via the hose /3 [10] falls in the 1st recycle container by its own weight and it is accumulated. The air conveyed together with the waste toner is introduced into the hose [5] from the air inlet [3] provided on the top of the No.1 collection box. It provides the area to which the waste toner can fall at the maximum as well as it decreases the content of the waste toner in the air taken to the hose [5]. The conveyance direction of the air taken to the 2nd recycle container [6] is switched upward. Waste toner contained in the air drops into the No.2 collection box by its own weight so that the waste toner conveyed to the filter [2] can be further reduced. The air is conveyed to the filter [2] via the hose [9] and the waste toner is separated from the air definitively, and then the air [1] is exhausted to the outside. II Composition/Operation
[10] [1] [9]
[2]
[8]
[3] [7]
[4]
[6] [5]
14rtt2c005na
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Air Filter Air intake 1st recycle box Hose
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
2nd recycle box Air + Waste toner (less) Air + Waste toner Hose Hose /3
2-5
Blank page
2-6
SERVICE MANUAL
Theory of Operation
IC Unit
2004.10 Ver. 1.0
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
OUTLINE
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Maintenance and Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Machine Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
II
1.1 1.2 Print Controllers Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Print Controllers Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 1.2.1 1.2.2 2.1 2.2 2.3 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 PostScript Protection Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
1. COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Each Function on the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Data flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
CONTENTS
I Outline
Blank Page
ii
I OUTLINE
1.1
Type: I Outline
Type
Built-in box type for the KONICA MINOLTA Printer/Copier
1.2
Functions
Printing System: 600 x 600 dpi Scanning Resolution: 200 dpi / 300 dpi/ 400 dpi / 600 dpi binary PCLXL: 2.54mm (left, right, top and bottom without variation) PCL5e: 4.23mm (left, right, top and bottom without variation) PS: 2.84mm (left, right, top and bottom without variation) 314 x 460mm (The maximum paper size: 324 x 460mm)
Resolution: Gradation: Printable Area:
No. of Print: Continuous Print Speed: Printer Description Language: Built-in fonts: Compliant OS:
1 to 9999 105 ppm (A4, 8.5 x 11) / (600 x 600 dpi) PCL (TIFF/PDF) PostScript3 (TIFF/PDF) (Option) Agfa Microtype fonts Adobe PostScript Font (optional PS3 kit required) Windows 98/Me Windows NT 4.0 (NT Service Pack 3 or more) Windows 2000 Windows XP Mac OS 8.x - 9.x (optional PS3 kit required) Mac OS X v10.2/v10.3 (optional PS3 kit required)
Printer Driver:
Printer driver for Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP PS printer driver for Windows (optional PS3 kit required) PS printer driver for Windows/Macintosh (optional PS3 kit required)
Network Functions Protocols: Compliant OS (NOS): TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPP, EtherTalk Novell NetWare (3.x, 4.x-6), Windows 95/98/Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS 8.x - 9.x, Mac OS X v10.2/v10.3 Multiple Protocols: Printing Method: Automatic selection Peer-to-Peer (TCP/IP for Windows 95/98/Me), Pserver (IPX/SPX), lpd/lpr (TCP/IP for Windows NT 4.0/2000), lpd/ lpr (TCP/IP for UNIX), AppleTalk (EtherTalk), NPrinter/ RPrinter (IPX/SPX), Port9100(TCP/IP) Dedicated Utilities: Compliant Web Browser: Peer to Peer Printing Tool Netscape Navigator, Internet Explorer
1 -1
1.3
I Outline
Paper
Same as copier Same as copier Same as copier
Paper Size: Paper Type: Paper Weight:
1.4
Maintenance and Life

Same as copier Same as copier
Maintenance: Machine Service Life:
1.5
CPU:
Machine Data
Low Voltage Pentium III Tualatin 933 MHz 256 MB (Standard), Expandable up to 512 MB (Option: EM-701) Parallel port Centronics (IEEE 1284 / amphenol 36 pin male connector) EIDE drive 40 GB or more PS3 kit Memory: (EM-701: 256 MB) Obtain from main body printer Ethernet (100Base-TX / 10Base-T) IEEE 802.3 100Base-TX / 10Base-T RJ-45 Green 2
System Memory: Host Interface: Hard Disk Drive: Option: Power: Network Functions Network Interface: Frame Type: Ethernet Connection: Network Connector: LED:
1.6
Operating Environment
Same as copier Same as copier
1 -2
COMPOSITION
1. COMPOSITION
1.1 Print Controllers Capabilities
This product is a print controller to serve as a printer or as a network scanner when used in combination with the copier that may be connected to computers or to networks. This print controller gets files from computers or Also, the copier functions as network scanner thus making it possible to send images that scanned into the copier to e-mail recipients as an attachment, to send to the FTP server/SMB server, or to store those scanned images on the hard disk in the print controller and import them by Adobe Acrobat or other TWAIN-compliant applications. This chapter describes product structure, how to use service tools, how to disassemble and reassemble, HDD formatting, troubleshooting, etc. When used as a printer
For use as a network printer
Copier
For use as a local printer Print Controller
prn_1050_system
2 -1
over networks and converts their contents into image data for the copier to be able to print out.
COMPOSITION When used as a scanner

Receiving as an E-Mail attached file:
E-Mail software
Downloading from FTP:

FTP client
Import
Storing in the internal HDD:

TWAIN-compliant applications Network Scanner Driver
File sharing using SMB protocol Original
SCAN
Copier SMB server
Box0003 Box0002
Copy Report Report Box0001 0001 Copy Report Report S 0001 Copy Document Printing Document canning Document Copy Report Report S 0001 Copy Document Printing Document canning Document Copy Report Report 0002 Copy Document Printing Document canning Document S Copy Report Report 0002 Copy Document Printing Document Scanning Document Copy Report Report 0002 Copy Document Printing Document Scanning Document Copy Document Printing Document Scanning Document
FTP server
Internal HDD
Data flow in scanning by the copier Data flow in importing by a computer
SMTP server (E-Mail)
prn_Scan_sys_10_v100
2 -2
COMPOSITION
1.2
Print Controllers Options
The Print Controller has the following options. Memory (EM-701), PostScript Protection Kit (PS-502) 1.2.1 Memory
The IC unit is equipped with 256 MB memory by default. Memory expansion is available by adding DIMM in the memory slot of the system board. Memory expansion enables more complex printing. When expanding memAbout memory expansion, see 3.2.2 Removal / Installation of Memory in Field Service section. Combinations of memory expansion DIMM1 256 MB 256 MB DIMM2 --256 MB Total Memory Size 256 MB 512 MB II Composition/Operation ory, be sure to install 256 MB memory (EM-701).
Caution At maximum, 512MB can be installed. Use the specified memory (EM-701) only. Use the memory slot with smaller number first.
1.2.2
PostScript Protection Kit
Adding PostScript Protection Kit enables to print PostScript data. If PostScript Protection Kit is fitted and print PostScript data, data are rasterized and printed with the highest resolution of the resulting in high-definition results. About installation of PostScript Protection Kit, see 3.2.3 Removal / Installation of PostScript Protection Kit of Fild service section.
2 -3
OPERATION
2. OPERATION
2.1 Operating Environment
The print controller includes a 933-MHz Intel Low Voltage Pentium III CPU to perform high-speed image processing (rasterization). While rasterized image data are sent to the engine, data in the following pages are simultaneously rasterized. Thus, it has 256MB memory by default, and this memory is expandable to 512 MB to accommodate extremely complex print data processing requirements. This design enables the print controller to produce outputs at high speed without causing the print engine to stop in the process even when processing a II Composition/Operation large number of pages. The print controller system software runs on VxWorks from Wind River and is included on the CF(Compact Flash). The hard disk is used for storing configured settings, storing the copiers scanned data and downloaded fonts, and for spooling print data. The scanned data is sent to PCs via the standard Ethernet Network Interface. The transmission and reception of scanned data between the print controller and the print engine is a task of a built-in engine interface (video interface). As well, the serial interface is used for checking software operations/memory, thus giving access to the system in the print controller.
System Board CPU
Service Port
Memory (Standard)
Memory (Optional)
HDD2
Compact Flash
GMCH*1
BIOS (Flash ROM)
Serial I/F
ICH2*2
IDE Bus
LPC Bus
PCI Bus
PS Protection Kit
Network I/F
Rasterization Parallel I/O
Engine I/F
Ethernet Network
Parallel Port
Engine
*1:GMCH =Graphics & Memory Controller Hub *2:ICH2 =I/O Controller Hub
prn_1050_system_flow
2 -4
OPERATION
2.2
Each Function on the System Board

Clock Generator BIOS Chip
Slot for Memory2 Slot for Memory1
CPU Serial Port (for servicing)
GMCH*1
Parallel I/F Connector
Super I/O
*2 ICH2
Slot for Compact Flash Parallel Chip
EBC
PostScript Protection Kit
RJ-45 Ethernet Network Port
PHY*3
Compression / Decompression Chip IDE Connector

prn_1050fig20
*1: GMCH = Graphics & Memory Controller Hub *2: ICH2 = I/O Controller Hub *3: PHY = PHYsical layer device (for LAN) I/F Controller Hub: Hard Disk Controller Compact Flash Controller PCI I/F LAN Controller Parallel I/F Controller EBC Controller Graphics & Memory Controller Hub: Super I/O: CPU Local Bus I/F Memory Controller Serial I/F Controller
2 -5
OPERATION
2.3
Data flow
Computer
Print Commands Printer Driver Spooler Application Web Browser
Parallel I/F ( IEEE 1284 )
Ethernet Network I/F

( TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk )
Interface
Parallel I/F ( IEEE 1284 )

I/F
RJ-45 Network I/F
Print Controller
PCI bus Input Buffer
Hard Disk
PDL Processing ( Rasterization ) / Interpreter
Page Memory
Printer Engine
PCI bus Image Memory
Print Engine ( Print )
PDL command
Rasterized image data
Printer status
prn_1050_data_flow
2 -6

Konica-Minolta BizHub Pro 1050,1050P Theory of Operation

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Konica-Minolta BizHub Pro 1050,1050P Theory of Operation

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

1050ma.

book Page 1 Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM

2005.03 Ver. 2.0

1050ma.book Page 2 Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM

1050matce.fm Page i Wednesday, March 2, 2005 11:10 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

Measures to take in case of an accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x I OUTLINE

1. OVERALL COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2. SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

1050matce.fm Page ii Wednesday, March 2, 2005 11:10 PM

CONTENTS 3.2.4 4.1 4.2 4.3

PCS correspondence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

1050matce.fm Page iii Wednesday, March 2, 2005 11:10 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

1050matce.fm Page iv Wednesday, March 2, 2005 11:10 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

1050ma.book Page v Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

To indicate clearly a section revised, show A number within

in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.

represents the number of times the revision has been made.

2005/03 2004/10 Date

2.0 1.0 Service manual Ver. Revision mark

1050ma.book Page vi Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

Composition of the service manual

1050ma.book Page vii Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

Notation of the service manual

When the description is made in combination of the OS's mentioned above:

1050ma.book Page viii Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 Description

Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds

1050ma.book Page ix Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM

1050ma.book Page x Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM

Measures to take in case of an accident

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

Measures to take in case of an accident

1050ma.book Page 1 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:23 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

1050ma.book Page 2 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:23 PM

1050ma.book Page 3 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:23 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

Original: Maximum original size: Copy size: Tray /1, /2:

1050ma.book Page 4 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:23 PM

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS No. of originals to be stored:

Plain paper *2: Special paper *3:

Special paper/recommended paper: Thick paper: Inch:

Maintenance: Machine service life:

1050ma.book Page 5 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:23 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

Power source: Power consumption: Weight: Dimensions: 1050: 1050P:

1050 + PF-701 + FD-501 + FS-503:

Temperature: Humidity: NOTE

1050ma.book Page 6 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:23 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

Photo conductor section

1050ma.book Page 7 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:23 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

1050ma.book Page 8 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:23 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

1050ma.book Page 1 Wednesday, March 2, 2005 3:52 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

Item Scanner motor (M27)

Plain paper 2: Special paper 3: